Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual - 2011

Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-39 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-45 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-29
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-48
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2011 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-14
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Vehicle Data Recording and
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Recommended Fluids, Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9

Introduction iii
This manual describes features Canadian Vehicle Owners

that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle either because Propritaires Canadiens
they are options that you did A French language copy of this
not purchase or due to changes manual can be obtained from your
subsequent to the printing of this dealer or from:
owner manual. Please refer to the
The names, logos, emblems, purchase documentation relating On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, to your specific vehicle to confirm ce guide en franais auprs du
and vehicle body designs appearing each of the features found on your concessionnaire ou l'adresse
in this manual including, but vehicle. For vehicles first sold suivante:
not limited to, GM, the GM logo, in Canada, substitute the name
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Helm, Incorporated
"General Motors of Canada Limited" P.O. Box 07130
Emblem, IMPALA, and the IMPALA for Chevrolet Motor Division
Emblem are trademarks and/or Detroit, MI 48207
wherever it appears in this manual.
service marks of General Motors 1-800-551-4123
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, Keep this manual in the vehicle for Numro de poste 6438
or licensors. quick reference. de langue franaise
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 20782813 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information The vehicle has components and
about the vehicle, use the Index These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
in the back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation
manual and the page number or information relating to a specific
where it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result
Danger, Warnings, and in property or vehicle damage. M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions This would not be covered by you need to see your owner manual
the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it
hazard that could result in injury or is a safety symbol which means
death. Do Not, Do not do this, or
Do not let this happen.

Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gauge
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
to the Index. Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light j : LATCH System Child
# : Air Conditioning Restraints
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls : : Oil Pressure
or OnStar } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature d : Traction Control
O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid

vi Introduction
2 NOTES

In Brief 1-1
In Brief Sensing System for Passenger

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Steering Wheel Electronic Stability
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-20
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Driving for Better Fuel
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Vehicle Features Roadside Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel

In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 85. L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Initial Drive

B. Remote Trunk Release Button. page 52.
See Trunk on page 210. M. Cruise Control on page 932.
Information
C. Turn and Lane-Change Signals N. Hood Release. See Hood on This section provides a brief
on page 64. page 105. overview about some of the
important features that may or
D. Instrument Cluster on O. Data Link Connector (DLC) may not be on your specific
page 511. (Out of View). See Malfunction vehicle.
E. Hazard Warning Flashers on Indicator Lamp on page 517.
For more detailed information, refer
page 64. P. Horn on page 53. to each of the features which can be
F. Driver Information Center (DIC) Q. Steering Wheel Controls on found later in this owner manual.
on page 526. page 53 (If Equipped).
G. Passenger Airbag Status R. Ignition Positions on page 917.
Indicator on page 516. S. Climate Control Systems on
H. Infotainment on page 71. page 81.
I. Exterior Lamp Controls on T. Power Outlets on page 58.
page 61. U. Center Console Shift Lever
J. Instrument Panel Illumination (If Equipped). See Shifting Into
Control on page 65. Park on page 921.
K. Traction Control System (TCS) V. Glove Box on page 41.
on page 929 (If Equipped).

1-4 In Brief
Remote Keyless Press Q to lock all doors. Remote Vehicle Start

Entry (RKE) System Lock and unlock feedback can With this feature the engine can be
The RKE transmitter is used to be personalized. See Vehicle started from outside of the vehicle.
remotely lock and unlock the doors Personalization on page 539
for additional information. Starting the Vehicle
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from
the vehicle. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Press and hold V for vehicle.
approximately one second
to open the trunk. 2. Press Q.
Press L and release to locate the 3. Immediately after completing
vehicle. Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash.
Press L and hold for more than
two seconds to sound the panic When the vehicle starts, the parking
alarm. lamps will turn on and remain on
as long as the engine is running.
Press L again to cancel the panic The doors will be locked and
alarm. the climate control system may
See Keys on page 22 and Remote come on.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System The engine will continue to run for
Press K to unlock the driver door. Operation on page 23. 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
Press again within five seconds to 10-minute time extension. Remote
unlock all remaining doors. start can be extended only once.

In Brief 1-5
Canceling a Remote Start Door Locks K : Press the top of the switch to
To cancel a remote start: unlock all doors.
Manual Locks
. Aim the RKE transmitter For more information, see:
From outside the vehicle, use
at the vehicle and press and . Power Door Locks on page 28.
the key in the door or the Remote
hold / until the parking lamps Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to . Delayed Locking on page 28.
turn off. lock or unlock the vehicle. From the
. Turn on the hazard warning inside, pull up or push down on the Trunk Release
flashers. manual door lock knobs.
In addition to the trunk release
. Turn the ignition on and then See Door Locks on page 27. button on the RKE transmitter, there
back off. Power Door Locks is a remote release V button
See Remote Vehicle Start on located on the left side of the
Power door lock switches are
page 25. instrument panel.
located on the front doors near
the handle. For more information, see Trunk on
page 210.
Q: Press the bottom of the switch
to lock all doors.

1-6 In Brief
Windows Seat Adjustment 2. Slide the seat to the desired

position and release the bar.
Manual Seats 3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 33.
To adjust the seatback, see Manual
Reclining Seatbacks under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 35.
The power window switches

are on the driver door armrest.
Each passenger door has a switch To adjust a manual seat:
that controls only that window. 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
Press the front of the switch to the of the seat cushion to unlock
first position to open the window. the seat.
Pull the switch up to close it.
For more information, see Power
Windows on page 216.

In Brief 1-7
Power Seats Power Reclining Seatback Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: To adjust a power seatback, Move the lever up or down to
. Move the seat forward or if equipped: increase or decrease lumbar
rearward by sliding the control . Tilt the top of the control support.
forward or rearward. rearward to recline. See Lumbar Adjustment on
. Raise or lower the front or rear . Tilt the top of the control forward page 34 for more information.
of the seat cushion by moving to raise.
the front or rear of the control See Power Reclining Seatbacks
up or down. under Reclining Seatbacks on
See Power Seat Adjustment on page 35.
page 34.

1-8 In Brief
. Lap Belt on page 323.
Second Row Seats Safety Belts
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
On vehicles with the flip and fold
Children (LATCH System) on
feature, the bottom seat cushions
page 351.
can be flipped forward and the
seatback folded down to create
an extended cargo area. Sensing System for
The vehicle also has an under seat
Passenger Airbag
storage area. The passenger sensing system will
See Rear Seats (Split Folding) on turn off the right front passenger
page 38 for more information. frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags,
seatside impact airbags, and
Head Restraint roofrail airbags are not affected
Adjustment by this.
Refer to the following sections for
Do not drive until the head restraints important information on how to use The passenger airbag status
for all occupants are installed and safety belts properly. indicator will be visible on the
adjusted properly. instrument panel when the vehicle
. Safety Belts on page 310. is started.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback . How to Wear Safety Belts
recline angle as little as necessary Properly on page 314.
while keeping the seat and the . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 319.
head restraint height in the proper
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 32 and Seat
Adjustment on page 33.

In Brief 1-9
Mirror Adjustment Interior Mirror

Exterior Mirrors Vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror can be adjusted by holding
the mirror in the center to move
it for a clearer view behind the
vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid
United States glare from the headlamps behind.
Pull the lever, located at the bottom
of the mirror for nighttime use.
Return the lever to its original
position for the day position.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 215.
Canada On vehicles with an automatic
See Passenger Sensing System on dimming rearview mirror, the mirror
page 334 for important information. Controls for the outside power will automatically adjust to reduce
mirrors are on the driver door the glare of lights from behind the
armrest. vehicle. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 215.
Press the left or right side of
the selector located above the
control pad to adjust the driver
or passenger mirror. Then press
the control pad to move the mirror
in the desired direction.
See Power Mirrors on page 214.

1-10 In Brief
. Delayed Entry Lighting on
Steering Wheel Interior Lighting page 67.
Adjustment Dome Lamp . Delayed Exit Lighting on
The center mounted dome lamp page 67.
overhead comes on when a door . Parade Dimming on page 67.
is opened. This lamp can also be
turned on by turning the instrument
panel brightness control clockwise.
Exterior Lighting
Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that
also act as the dome lamp. Press
the button near each lamp to turn
them on and off.
Map Lamps
The tilt wheel lever is located on the
left side of the steering column. The vehicle has map lamps on the
rearview mirror. Push the button
To adjust the steering wheel: near each lamp to turn the map
1. Hold the wheel and pull the lever lamps on and off.
toward you. For more information on interior
2. Move the steering wheel up lighting, see: The exterior lamps control is located
or down. on the instrument panel to the left of
. Exterior Lighting on page 110. the steering wheel.
3. Release the lever to lock the . Courtesy Lamps on page 65.
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.

In Brief 1-11
P : Briefly turn to this position Windshield Wiper/Washer 9 : Turns the windshield

to manually turn the automatic wipers off.
lamp control and Daytime Running 6: Turn the band up for more
Lamps (DRL) off or on. For vehicles frequent wipes or down for less
first sold in Canada, the off position frequent wipes.
only works when the vehicle is
shifted into the P (Park) position. 6 : Slow wipes.
AUTO: Automatically operates the ? : Fast wipes.
headlamps and other exterior lamps Windshield Washer
at normal brightness.
; : Turns on the parking lamps Push the paddle L at the top of the
and taillamps. lever to spray washer fluid on the
windshield.
2 : Turns on the headlamps and
other exterior lamps. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
The lever is located on the left side page 54.
# : (If Equipped) Turns on the fog of the steering column.
lamps. 8: Single wipe, turn to 8, then
For more information, see: release. Several wipes, hold the
. Exterior Lamp Controls on band on 8 longer.
page 61.
. Fog Lamps on page 65.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System on
page 63.

1-12 In Brief
Climate Controls
This vehicle may have a dual or single climate control system. The heating,
cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation can be controlled with either of these
systems.
Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
A. Fan Control F. Driver and Passenger Heated

B. Outside Air Seats
C. Recirculation G. Driver and Passenger

Temperature Controls
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
H. Rear Window Defogger
E. Air Conditioning

In Brief 1-13
Single Zone
A. Fan Control F. Air Conditioning

B. Outside Air G. Rear Window Defogger
C. Temperature Control See Climate Control Systems on
D. Recirculation page 81.
E. Air Delivery Mode Control

1-14 In Brief
Vehicle Features : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Press to display additional text
Radio(s) information related to the current
FM-RDS or XM station; or CD,
MP3, or WMA song. If information
is available during XM, CD, MP3,
or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top
line of the display and artist
information displays on the bottom
line. When information is not
available, No Info displays.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Infotainment on page 71.
Radio with CD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM, if equipped.
decrease the volume. f: Select radio stations.

In Brief 1-15
Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock Satellite Radio

Depending on which radio the To set the time and date for the XM is a satellite radio service
vehicle has, radio stations are Radio with CD (MP3): based in the 48 contiguous
stored as either favorites or 1. Turn the radio on. United States and 10 Canadian
presets. provinces. XM satellite radio has a
For radios with a FAV button, 2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, wide variety of programming and
a maximum of 36 stations can DD, and YYYY (hour, minute, commercial-free music, coast to
be stored as favorites using the month, day, and year) display. coast, and in digital-quality sound.
6 softkeys located below the radio 3. Press the pushbutton located A fee is required to receive the
station frequency tabs and by using below any one of the tabs that XM service.
the radio FAV button. Press FAV you want to change.
to go through up to 6 pages of For more information, refer to:
favorites, each having 6 favorite 4. Increase or decrease the time or . www.xmradio.com or call
stations available per page. Each date by turning f clockwise or 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
page of favorites can contain any counterclockwise. . www.xmradio.ca or call
combination of AM, FM, or XM For detailed instructions on setting 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
stations. the clock for your specific audio
system, see Clock on page 57. See Satellite Radio on page 79.
For radios without a FAV button, up
to 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, and
6 AM), can be programmed on the
6 numbered buttons.
See Operation on page 72.

1-16 In Brief
Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth Steering Wheel Controls

This vehicle may have an auxiliary For vehicles with a Bluetooth
input jack, located on the audio system, it allows users with a
faceplate. External devices such Bluetoothenabled cell phone to
as iPods, MP3 players, etc. can make and receive hands-free calls
be connected to the auxiliary input using the vehicles audio system
jack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input and controls.
jack cable. The Bluetoothenabled cell phone
See Using the Auxiliary Input must be paired with the Bluetooth
Jack under Auxiliary Devices on system before it can be used in the
page 721. vehicle. Not all phones will support
all functions. For more information,
visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth If equipped, these controls are
on page 721. located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
w : Press to go to the next radio
station stored as a favorite, or the
next track if a CD is playing.

In Brief 1-17
bg: Press to silence the vehicle Cruise Control +RES: Press briefly to make the
speakers only. Press again to turn vehicle resume to a previously
the sound on. Press and hold longer set speed, or press and hold to
than two seconds to interact with accelerate.
the OnStar or Bluetooth systems, SET: Press to set the speed and
if equipped. activate cruise control or make the
c x : Press to go to the vehicle decelerate.
previous radio station stored as a [ : Press to disengage cruise
favorite, the next track if a CD is control without erasing the set
playing, reject an incoming call, speed from memory.
or end a current call.
For more information, see Cruise
SRCE : Press to choose between Control on page 932.
the radio, CD, and auxiliary
input jack.
The cruise control buttons are
+ e e : Press to increase or located on the left side of the
decrease volume. steering wheel.
: Press to go to the next radio J: Press to turn cruise control on
station while in AM, FM, or XM. and off. The indicator is lit when
Press to go to the next track or cruise control is on.
chapter while sourced to the CD.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 53.

1-18 In Brief
. For vehicles with traction control
Power Outlets Performance and and electronic stability control,
The vehicle has three 12volt Maintenance press and release 5 on the
outlets which can be used to plug instrument panel to turn off
in electrical equipment, such as a
cell phone or MP3 player.
Traction Control traction control. F illuminates
System (TCS) and the appropriate DIC
On vehicles with a center console, message displays. See Ride
one outlet is located inside The vehicle may have a traction Control System Messages on
the center floor console and control system which limits page 535.
two outlets are located at the wheel spin. The system turns
front of the console bin under on automatically every time the
. Press and release the button
the instrument panel. vehicle is started. again to turn on traction control.
On vehicles without a center . For vehicles with traction control, For more information, see Traction
console, two are located under the press and release i on the Control System (TCS) on
climate controls and another outlet page 929.
instrument panel to turn off
for the rear seat passengers is at traction control. F illuminates
the rear of the center front seat.
and the appropriate DIC
Remove the cover to access and message displays. See Ride
replace when not in use. Control System Messages on
See Power Outlets on page 58. page 535.

In Brief 1-19
Electronic Stability Tire Pressure Monitor Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 912. The warning
Control (ESC) This vehicle may have a Tire light will remain on until the tire
The Electronic Stability Control Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). pressure is corrected.
system assists with directional During cooler conditions, the low tire
control of the vehicle in difficult pressure warning light may appear
driving conditions. The system when the vehicle is first started and
turns on automatically every time then turn off. This may be an early
the vehicle is started. indicator that the tire pressures are
. To turn off both traction getting low and the tires need to be
control and Electronic inflated to the proper pressure.
Stability Control, press and The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure The TPMS does not replace normal
hold 5 on the instrument of one of the vehicle's tires. If the monthly tire maintenance. It is the
panel until F illuminates and warning light comes on, stop as drivers responsibility to maintain
the appropriate DIC message soon as possible and inflate the correct tire pressures.
displays. See Ride Control tires to the recommended pressure See Tire Pressure Monitor System
System Messages on page 535. shown on the Tire and Loading on page 1051.
. Press and release the button
again to turn on both systems.
For more information, see Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on
page 931.

1-20 In Brief
. Avoid idling the engine for long
Engine Oil Life System Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) periods of time.
The engine oil life system calculates Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge . When road and weather
engine oil life based on vehicle use and a yellow fuel cap can use either
conditions are appropriate,
and displays a DIC message when unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
use cruise control.
it is necessary to change the engine containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
oil and filter. The oil life system See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on . Always follow posted speed
should be reset to 100% only page 938. For all other vehicles, limits or drive more slowly when
following an oil change. use only the unleaded gasoline conditions require.
described under Recommended . Keep vehicle tires properly
Resetting the Oil Life System Fuel on page 935. inflated.
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC. Driving for Better Fuel
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET Economy
button on the DIC for more than
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
Driving habits can affect fuel the same TPC Spec number
five seconds. The oil life will
mileage. Here are some driving molded into the tire's sidewall
change to 100%.
tips to get the best fuel economy near the size.
See Engine Oil Life System on possible.
page 1011.
. Follow recommended scheduled
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate maintenance.
smoothly.
. Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.

In Brief 1-21
Roadside Assistance Online Owner Center Automatic Crash Response

Program The Online Owner Center is a In a crash, builtin sensors can
complimentary service that includes automatically alert an OnStar
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 online service reminders, vehicle Advisor who is immediately
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 maintenance tips, online owner connected to the vehicle to see
manual, special privileges, if you need help.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
and more.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, How OnStar Service Works
Sign up today at:
you are automatically enrolled in
www.chevyownercenter.com Q : This blue button connects
the Roadside Assistance program. you to a specially trained OnStar
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
See Roadside Assistance Program Advisor to verify your account
information and to answer
on page 136 for more information. OnStar questions.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
] : Push this red emergency
If you have an active OnStar button to get priority help from
subscription, press the Q button specially trained OnStar Emergency
and the current GPS location will Advisors.
be sent to an OnStar advisor who X : Push this button for handsfree,
will assess your problem, contact voiceactivated calling and to give
Roadside Assistance, and relay voice commands for TurnbyTurn
your exact location to get the help OnStar uses several innovative
technologies and live Advisors to Navigation.
you need.
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.

1-22 In Brief
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle OnStar service requires wireless OnStar service may not work if the
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, communication networks and the OnStar equipment isnt properly
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside Global Positioning System (GPS) installed or you havent maintained
Assistance, TurnbyTurn satellite network. Not all OnStar it and your vehicle is in good
Navigation, and HandsFree services are available everywhere working order and in compliance
Calling are available on most or on all vehicles at all times. with all government regulations.
vehicles. Not all OnStar services OnStar service cant work unless If you try to add, connect, or modify
are available on all vehicles. your vehicle is in a place where any equipment or software in your
For more information see the OnStar has an agreement with vehicle, OnStar service may not
OnStar Owner's Guide or visit a wireless service provider for work. Other problems OnStar cant
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or service in that area, and the control may prevent service to you,
www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact wireless service provider has such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR coverage, network capacity, weather, electrical system design
(18884667827) or TTY reception, and technology and architecture of your vehicle,
18772482080, or push Q to compatible with OnStar service. damage to important parts of your
speak with an OnStar Advisor Service involving location vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
24 hours a day, 7 days a week. information about your vehicle network congestion or jamming.
For a full description of OnStar cant work unless GPS signals See Radio Frequency Statement on
services and system limitations, are available, unobstructed, page 1317 for information
see the OnStar Owner's Guide and compatible with the OnStar regarding Part 15 of the Federal
in the glove box. hardware. The vehicle has to have Communications Commission
a working electrical system and (FCC) rules and Industry Canada
OnStar service is subject to the adequate battery power for the Standards RSS-210/220/310.
OnStar Terms and Conditions OnStar equipment to operate.
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.

In Brief 1-23
OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility OnStar

Controls Increase the volume of the radio If the vehicle is equipped with an
This vehicle may have if the OnStar Advisor cannot be active OnStar system, that system
a b g / c x Talk/Mute button heard. may also record data in crash
that can be used to interact with If the light next to the OnStar or near crash-like situations.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling. buttons is red, the system The OnStar Terms and Conditions
See Steering Wheel Controls on may not be functioning provides information on data
page 53 for more information. collection and use and is available
properly. Push Q and request in the OnStar Glove Box Kit,
On some vehicles, the mute button a vehicle diagnostic check. at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
can be used to dial numbers into If the light appears clear www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
voice mail systems, or to dial phone (no light is appearing), your
pushing Q and speaking to an
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's OnStar subscription has expired
and all services have been Advisor.
Guide for more information.
deactivated. Push Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.

1-24 In Brief
2 NOTES

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15
Windows Vehicle Security
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-11 Windows
Keys and Locks Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) System
Keys See Radio Frequency
Statement on page 1317 for
{ WARNING information regarding Part 15
of the Federal Communications
Leaving children in a vehicle with Commission (FCC) rules and
the ignition key is dangerous for Industry Canada Standards
many reasons. Children or others RSS-210/220/310.
could be badly injured or even
If there is a decrease in the RKE
killed. They could operate the
operating range:
power windows or other controls
The key can be used for the ignition . Check the distance.
or even make the vehicle move.
and the driver's door. If the vehicle The transmitter may be
The windows will function with the is a taxi model, the key can also be
keys in the ignition and children too far from the vehicle.
used in the trunk.
could be seriously injured or killed . Check the location. Other
if caught in the path of a closing See your dealer if a replacement vehicles or objects may be
window. Do not leave the keys in key or additional key is needed. blocking the signal.
a vehicle with children. Notice: If the keys get locked . Check the transmitter's battery.
in the vehicle, it may have to See Battery Replacement later
be damaged to get them out. in this section.
Always carry a spare key.
. If the transmitter is still not
If you are locked out of your vehicle, working correctly, see your
contact Roadside Assistance. See dealer or a qualified technician
Roadside Assistance Program on for service.
page 136 for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry / (Remote Vehicle Start): For K (Unlock): Press once to
(RKE) System Operation vehicles with this feature, press to unlock the driver door. If K is
start the engine from outside the pressed again within five seconds,
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) vehicle using the RKE transmitter. all remaining doors unlock.
transmitter functions work up to See Remote Vehicle Start on The interior lamps come on
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle. page 25 for additional information. and stay on for 20 seconds or
There are other conditions which Q (Lock): Press to lock all the until the ignition is turned on.
can affect the performance of the doors. If enabled through the If enabled through the DIC,
transmitter. See Remote Keyless Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps flash twice
Entry (RKE) System on page 22. the parking lamps flash once to to indicate unlocking has occurred.
indicate locking has occurred. See Vehicle Personalization on
If enabled through the DIC, the page 539.
horn chirps when Q is pressed Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
again within five seconds. disarms the content theftdeterrent
See Vehicle Personalization on system. See Anti-Theft Alarm
page 539 for additional information. System on page 211.
Pressing Q may arm the V (Remote Trunk Release):
content theftdeterrent system. Press and hold for about
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on one second to open the trunk.
page 211. The transmission must be in
P (Park).
With Remote Start Shown,
Without Remote Start Similar

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement

Alarm): Press and release to the Vehicle Replace the battery if the
locate the vehicle. The turn signal Only RKE transmitters REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE
lamps flash and the horn sounds programmed to the vehicle KEY message displays in the DIC.
three times. Press and hold L for will work. If a transmitter is See REPLACE BATTERY IN
more than two seconds to activate lost or stolen, a replacement REMOTE KEY under Key and
the panic alarm. The turn signal can be purchased and programmed Lock Messages on page 534
lamps flash and the horn sounds through your dealer. When for additional information.
repeatedly for 30 seconds. The the replacement transmitter is Notice: When replacing the
alarm turns off when the ignition programmed to the vehicle, all battery, do not touch any of
is turned to ON/RUN or L is remaining transmitters must also the circuitry on the transmitter.
pressed again. The ignition must be programmed. Any lost or stolen Static from your body could
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic transmitters no longer work once damage the transmitter.
alarm to work. the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight
transmitters programmed to it.
See your dealer to program new
transmitters.

2. Remove the old battery. Do not Laws in some communities may

use a metal object. restrict the use of remote starters.
3. Insert the new battery, positive For example, some laws may
side facing down. Replace with require a person using remote start
a CR2032 or equivalent battery. to have the vehicle in view when
doing so. Check local regulations
4. Snap the transmitter back for any requirements on remote
together. starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature
Remote Vehicle Start if your vehicle is low on fuel.
Your vehicle may have a remote Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
starting feature that allows you If your vehicle has the remote
To replace the battery: to start the engine from outside start feature, the RKE transmitter
the vehicle. It may also start the functions will have an increased
1. Separate the transmitter with a
vehicle's heating or air conditioning range of operation. However, the
flat, thin object, such as a flat
systems and rear window defogger. range may be less while the vehicle
head screwdriver.
When the remote start system is running.
. Carefully insert the tool into is active and the vehicle has an
the notch located along automatic climate control system, it There are other conditions which
the parting line of the will automatically regulate the inside can affect the performance of the
transmitter. Do not insert temperature. Normal operation of transmitter. See Remote Keyless
the tool too far. Stop as these systems will return after the Entry (RKE) System on page 22.
soon as resistance is felt. ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
. Twist the tool until the
transmitter is separated.

/ (Remote Start): This button will with a time extension. The first start To manually shut off a remote start,
be on the RKE transmitter if you must expire or be canceled to get do any of the following.
have remote start. two separate 10-minute starts. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
To start the vehicle using the remote If it is the first remote start since the vehicle and press and release
start feature: vehicle has been driven, repeat the the remote start button.
previous steps, while the engine is . Turn on the hazard warning
1. Aim the transmitter at the still running, to extend the engine
vehicle. flashers.
running time by 10 minutes from the
time you repeat the steps for remote . Turn the ignition switch out of
2. Press and release Q, then
starting. The remote start running LOCK/OFF and then back to
immediately press and
time can be extended one time and LOCK/OFF.
hold / for two to four seconds only after the first remote start.
or until the vehicle's turn signal After the engine has been started
lamps flash. The doors will lock. After entering the vehicle during a two times, or one time with a time
remote start, insert and turn the key extension, the vehicle's ignition
When the vehicle starts, the to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle. must be turned to ON/RUN using
parking lamps turn on and the key before the remote start
remain on while the engine The engine will shut off procedure can be used again.
is running. automatically after 10 minutes, See Ignition Positions on page 917
unless a time extension has been for information regarding the ignition
The remote start feature provides done or the vehicle's key is inserted
two separate starts per ignition positions on your vehicle.
into the ignition switch and turned to
cycle, each with 10 minutes of ON/RUN.
engine running time, or one start

The remote vehicle start feature Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

will not operate if any of the follow
occur:
. The vehicle's key is in the
{ WARNING injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
ignition. Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
. The vehicle's hood is open. dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
. The hazard warning flashers
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
are on. children, can easily open when you slow down or stop
the doors and fall out of a the vehicle. Locking the doors
. The check engine light is on. moving vehicle. When a door can help prevent this from
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp is locked, the handle will not happening.
on page 517. open it. The chance of being
. The engine coolant temperature thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the From the outside, use the key in
is too high. the driver door or use the Remote
doors are not locked. So,
. The oil pressure is low. all passengers should wear Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
safety belts properly and to lock and unlock the vehicle.
. The content theft-deterrent alarm
the doors should be locked From the inside, use the manual
has been activated.
whenever the vehicle is or power door locks.
. Two remote vehicle starts,
driven. To lock or unlock the driver side
or one start with a time
. Young children who get into door from the outside with the key,
extension, have already been
unlocked vehicles may be insert the key and turn it clockwise
provided for that ignition cycle.
unable to get out. A child can or counterclockwise.
be overcome by extreme heat To lock or unlock the door from the
and can suffer permanent inside, push or pull the manual
(Continued) lock knob.

Power Door Locks Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks

This feature allows the driver to The doors will automatically lock
delay the actual locking of the when the shift lever is moved out
doors. When the driver power of P (Park). The automatic door
door lock switch is pressed with locking feature cannot be disabled.
the key removed from the ignition,
and the driver door open, a chime Programmable Automatic Door
will sound three times to signal Unlock
that the delayed locking system The vehicle is programmed so that
is active. When all doors have when the shift lever is moved into
been closed, the doors will lock P (Park) all doors will unlock.
automatically after several seconds.
If any door is opened before this, With the vehicle stopped and
A power door lock switch is located the timer will reset itself once all the engine running, door
on both front doors next to the door the doors have been closed again. unlocking can be programmed
handle. through prompts displayed on the
Pressing the driver or passenger Driver Information Center (DIC).
Press the top of the switch to unlock power door lock switch again or the These prompts allow the driver to
all doors or press the bottom of the RKE transmitter button will override choose various unlock settings.
switch to lock all doors. this feature. For programming information,
If the vehicle has the optional see Vehicle Personalization on
Personal Choice Programming
content theft-deterrent system page 539.
and it is armed, the power door The delayed locking feature can
lock switches will be disabled. be turned on or off, using the
You must use the RKE transmitter Driver Information Center (DIC) to
or the key to unlock the doors when program this feature. See DELAY
the system is armed. See Anti-Theft DOOR LOCK under Vehicle
Alarm System on page 211. Personalization on page 539.

Lockout Protection To assist in finding the lock, the To open a rear door when the
vehicle has the following: security lock is on, do the following:
This feature helps prevent you from
locking the doors while the key is 1. Unlock the door by using the
in the ignition. Always remember to Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
take your key with you when exiting transmitter, if the vehicle has
the vehicle. one, by pressing the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear
If the lock switch is pressed on the door manual lock.
door that is open and the key is in
the ignition, all of the doors will lock 2. Open the door from the outside.
and then the open door will unlock. To cancel the rear door
A chime sounds continuously until security lock:
the driver door is closed.
1. Unlock the door and open it from
the outside.
Safety Locks
2. Insert the key into the security
Rear door security locks prevent To use the lock:
lock slot and turn it so the slot is
passengers from opening the rear 1. Insert the key into the security in the vertical position.
doors from the inside. lock slot and turn it so the slot is
3. Do the same for the other
The rear door security locks are in the horizontal position.
rear door.
located on the inside edge of each 2. Close the door.
rear door. The rear doors must be
opened to access them. 3. Do the same for the other
rear door.

Doors Trunk Release

WARNING (Continued)
To open the trunk from the outside,
Trunk If the vehicle must be driven with press the trunk release button on
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: the RKE transmitter, if equipped.
{ WARNING . Close all of the windows. Remote Trunk Release
Exhaust gases can enter the
. Fully open the air outlets G (Remote Trunk Release):
vehicle if it is driven with the on or under the instrument Press the button located next to the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or panel. exterior lamps control on the left
with any objects that pass . Adjust the Climate Control side of the instrument panel to open
through the seal between the system to a setting that the trunk. The shift lever must be in
body and the trunk/hatch or brings in only outside air P (Park).
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains and set the fan speed to the The trunk can also be opened by
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which highest setting. See Climate lowering the rear seat and pulling
cannot be seen or smelled. Control System in the Index. the emergency trunk release handle
It can cause unconsciousness . If the vehicle is equipped with located inside the trunk. See Rear
and even death. a power liftgate, disable the Seats (Split Folding) on page 38
power liftgate function. and Emergency Trunk Release
(Continued) Handle following.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 924.

Emergency Trunk Release Vehicle Security

Handle
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
Notice: Do not use the features; however, they do not
emergency trunk release handle make it impossible to steal.
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk Anti-Theft Alarm System
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release Your vehicle may have the optional
handle is only intended to aid a content theft-deterrent alarm
person trapped in a latched trunk, system.
enabling them to open the trunk To activate the theft-deterrent
from the inside. system:
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk
release handle located on the latch 1. Open the door.
inside the trunk . This handle will 2. Lock the door with the power
glow following exposure to light. door lock switch or the Remote
Pull the release handle to open Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
the trunk from the inside. If you are using the RKE
transmitter, the door does
not need to be open.
3. Close all doors.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if Arming with the RKE Immobilizer
someone tries to enter the vehicle Transmitter
without using the RKE transmitter See Radio Frequency
or a key or turns the ignition on The alarm system will arm when Statement on page 1317 for
with an incorrect key. The horn will you use your RKE transmitter to information regarding Part 15
sound and the turn signal lamps will lock the doors, if the key is not in of the Federal Communications
flash for about 30 seconds. the ignition. Commission (FCC) rules and
Industry Canada Standards
When the alarm is armed, the Disarming with the RKE RSS-210/220/310.
trunk may be opened with the Transmitter
RKE transmitter. The power door The alarm system will disarm when Immobilizer Operation
lock switches are disabled and the you use your RKE transmitter to
doors remain locked. You must use unlock the doors. This vehicle has PASS-Key III+
your RKE transmitter or your key to (Personalized Automotive Security
unlock the doors when the system The first time a remote unlock System) theft-deterrent system.
is armed. command is received, three flashes PASS-Key III+ is a passive
will be seen and three horn chirps theft-deterrent system.
Arming with the Power Lock heard to indicate an alarm condition
Switch has occurred since last arming. The system is automatically armed
when the key is removed from the
The alarm system will arm when Disarming with Your Key ignition.
you use either power lock switch
to lock the doors while any door is The alarm system will disarm The system is automatically
open and the key is removed from when you use your key to unlock disarmed when the key is turned
the ignition. The alarm system will the doors or insert your key in to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
not arm if the trunk is open when the ignition and turn it from the or START from the LOCK/OFF
you use either power lock switch LOCK/OFF position. position.
to lock the doors.

You do not have to manually arm or If the engine still does not start, See your dealer or a locksmith who
disarm the system. and the key appears to be can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
The security light will come on if undamaged, try another ignition new key blank cut exactly as the
there is a problem with arming key. At this time, you may also want ignition key that operates the
or disarming the theft-deterrent to check the fuse. See Fuses and system.
system. Circuit Breakers on page 1038. To program the new additional key:
If the engine still does not start
When the PASS-Key III+ system with the other key, the vehicle 1. Verify that the new key has
senses that someone is using the needs service. If the vehicle does a 1 stamped on it.
wrong key, it prevents the vehicle start, the first key may be faulty.
from starting. Anyone using a See your dealer who can service 2. Insert the original, already
trial-and-error method to start the the PASS-Key III+ to have a new programmed key in the ignition
vehicle will be discouraged because key made. and start the engine. If the
of the high number of electrical key engine will not start, see your
codes. It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ dealer for service.
decoder to learn the transponder
If the engine does not start and value of a new or replacement key. 3. After the engine has started,
the security light on the instrument Up to 10 keys may be programmed turn the key to LOCK/OFF,
panel cluster comes on when trying for the vehicle. The following and remove the key.
to start the vehicle, there may be procedure is for programming
a problem with the theft-deterrent additional keys only. If all the
system. Turn the ignition off and currently programmed keys are
try again. lost or do not operate, you must
see your dealer or a locksmith
who can service PASS-Key III+ to
have keys made and programmed
to the system.

4. Insert the new key to be Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors

programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within
five seconds of turning the Convex Mirrors
ignition to the LOCK/OFF
position in Step 3. { WARNING
The security light will turn A convex mirror can make things,
off once the key has been like other vehicles, look farther
programmed.
away than they really are. If you
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if cut too sharply into the right lane,
additional keys are to be you could hit a vehicle on the
programmed. right. Check the inside mirror or
If you lose or damage your glance over your shoulder before
PASS-Key III+ key, see your changing lanes.
dealer or a locksmith who can Controls for the outside power
service PASS-Key III+ to have mirrors are located on the driver
The passenger side mirror is convex door armrest.
a new key made. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
Do not leave the key or device curved so more can be seen from 1. Press the left or right side of the
that disarms or deactivates the the driver seat. selector switch located above
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. the control pad, to select the
driver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four buttons Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming

located on the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired
Rearview Mirror
direction. Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic
3. Adjust each outside mirror so Adjust the inside rearview mirror dimming inside rearview mirror.
that a little of the vehicle and for a clear view of the area behind Automatic dimming reduces the
the area behind it can be seen. your vehicle. To avoid glare of the glare from the headlamps of the
headlamps from behind, push the vehicle behind you. The dimming
Keep the selector switch in the tab forward for daytime and pull it
center position when not adjusting feature comes on and the indicator
for nighttime use. light illuminates each time the
either outside mirror.
Vehicles with OnStar have three ignition is turned to start.
Heated Mirrors control buttons at the bottom of the O (On/Off): Press to turn the
mirror. See your dealer for more dimming feature on or off.
For vehicles with heated mirrors: information about OnStar and how
to subscribe to it. See the OnStar Vehicles with OnStar have three
= (Rear Window Defogger): additional control buttons for the
Press to heat the outside rearview Owner's Guide for more information
about the services OnStar provides. OnStar system. See your dealer
mirrors. See Rear Window for more information about OnStar
Defogger under Climate Control and how to subscribe to it. See
Systems on page 81 for more the OnStar Owner Guide for more
information. information about the services
OnStar provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.

Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING { WARNING
Leaving children, helpless Leaving children in a vehicle with
adults, or pets in a vehicle the keys is dangerous for many
with the windows closed is reasons. Children or others could
dangerous. They can be be badly injured or even killed.
overcome by the extreme heat They could operate the power
and suffer permanent injuries windows or other controls or
or even death from heat stroke. even make the vehicle move.
Never leave a child, a helpless The windows will function and
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, The vehicle aerodynamics are they could be seriously injured
designed to improve fuel economy or killed if caught in the path of
especially with the windows
performance. This may result in a closing window. Do not leave
closed in warm or hot weather.
a pulsing sound when either rear keys in a vehicle with children.
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the When there are children in the
sound, open either a front window rear seat use the window lockout
or the sunroof (if equipped). button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.

Express-Down Window Sun Visors

The driver window switch has
an express-down feature labeled
AUTO. This lets you lower the
window completely without holding
the switch. Press the front of the
switch to the second position and
release.
To stop the window while it is
lowering, briefly pull up on the
switch.
The switches on the driver door Window Lockout
armrest are used to control each of
the windows. Each passenger door o (Window Lockout): The driver
has its own window switch. window switches also include a Pull the sun visor down to block
lockout switch. Press the right glare. Detach the sun visor from the
The power window switches work center mount to pivot to the side
side of the switch to prevent the
while the ignition is in ON/RUN, window, or to extend along the rod,
rear passengers from using their
ACC/ACCESSORY, or while if available.
window switches. The driver can
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
still control all the windows and the
is active. See Retained Accessory
front passenger can control their
Power (RAP) on page 921.
own window with the lockout on.
To lower the window, press and hold Press the left side of the switch to
the front of the switch to the first return to normal window operation.
position until the window is at the A red bar on the right side of the
desired level. To raise the window, switch indicates that the lockout
pull up and hold the front of the is off.
switch.

Roof The sunroof can only be operated R (Close): Press and hold this
when the ignition is in ON/RUN switch until the sunroof motor stops
or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when to close the sunroof, or release the
Sunroof Retained Accessory Power (RAP) switch when the desired position
is active. See Retained Accessory has been reached.
Power (RAP) on page 921.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
Q (Vent/Express-Open): Press sunroof seal or in the track. This
this switch once to vent the sunroof could cause an issue with sunroof
when it is closed. When using the operation, noise or plugging the
vent, the sunshade should be fully water drainage system. Periodically
opened. The sunshade can be open the sunroof and remove any
opened or closed manually by obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sliding it rearward or forward. sunroof seal and roof sealing area
From the vent position, press using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
this switch again to activate the water. Do not remove grease from
express-open feature. Press the sunroof.
close switch to stop movement of
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the sunroof. The sunshade will
the sunroof switches are on
automatically open when using
the overhead console.
expressopen.
A deflector will automatically pop
up when the sunroof is opened.
The deflector will retract when the
sunroof is closed.

Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .

Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
3-24
3-25
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belt System
3-25 Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-47
Head Restraints Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-49
Airbag System Lower Anchors and Tethers
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-28 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 When Should an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-57
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 (Center Front Seat
What Will You See After an Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Rear Seats Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats (Split Folding) . . . . . 3-8 Passenger Sensing (Right Front Seat
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
How to Wear Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-40
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-41
Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are
not installed and adjusted
properly, there is a greater
chance that occupants will
suffer a neck/spinal injury in a Adjust the head restraint so that the To lower the head restraint, press
crash. Do not drive until the head top of the restraint is at the same the button located on top of the
restraints for all occupants are height as the top of the occupant's seatback, and push the head
installed and adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the restraint down. Try to move the
chance of a neck injury in a crash. head restraint after the button is
The height of the head restraint can released to make sure that it is
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint locked in place.
up to raise it. Try to move the head The front seat outboard head
restraint to make sure that it is restraints are not designed to be
locked in place. removed.

Rear Seat Front Seats

The vehicle's rear seat has head
restraints in the outboard seating Seat Adjustment
positions that cannot be adjusted.
The vehicle's rear seat has a
headrest in the center seating
{ WARNING
position that cannot be adjusted. You can lose control of the
The rear seat head restraints and vehicle if you try to adjust a
headrest are not designed to be manual driver seat while the
removed. vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
To adjust the seat:
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
the vehicle is not moving. of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.

Center Seat Power Seat Adjustment The driver seat may have
power reclining seatbacks.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks
under Reclining Seatbacks on
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
The vehicle may have a front center To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
seat. There are cupholders on . Move the seat forward or
the underside of the seat cushion. rearward by sliding the control
To use them, flip the seat cushion forward or rearward.
forward. The seat can also be used
as a storage area by lowering the . Raise or lower the front or rear
seatback. See Center Console of the seat cushion by moving
Storage on page 42. the front or rear of the control up
or down. Move the lever up or down to
The seatback doubles as an increase or decrease lumbar
armrest for the driver or front support.
passenger when the center seat
is unoccupied.

Reclining Seatbacks WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt
Sitting in a reclined position when could go up over your abdomen.
the vehicle is in motion can be The belt forces would be there,
dangerous. Even when buckled not at your pelvic bones. This
up, the safety belts cannot do could cause serious internal
their job when reclined like this. injuries.
The shoulder belt cannot do its For proper protection when the
job because it will not be against vehicle is in motion, have the
your body. Instead, it will be in seatback upright. Then sit well Do not have a seatback reclined if
front of you. In a crash, you could back in the seat and wear the the vehicle is moving.
go into it, receiving neck or other safety belt properly.
injuries.
(Continued)

Manual Reclining Seatbacks Power Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want to. To recline a manual seatback:
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. 1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then To adjust a power seatback,
release the lever to lock the if equipped:
{ WARNING seatback in place. . Tilt the top of the control
If either seatback is not locked, it 3. Push and pull on the seatback to rearward to recline.
could move forward in a sudden make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright
. Tilt the top of the control forward
stop or crash. That could cause to raise.
injury to the person sitting there. position:
Always push and pull on the 1. Lift the lever fully without
seatbacks to be sure they are applying pressure to the
locked. seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.

Heated Front Seats Press the button once for the

highest setting. With each press
of the button, the heated seat
{ WARNING will change to the next lower
If you cannot feel temperature setting, and then to the off setting.
The lights indicate two for the
change or pain to the skin, the
highest setting and one for the
seat heater may cause burns
lowest.
even at low temperatures.
To reduce the risk of burns, The passenger seat may take
people with such a condition longer to heat up.
should use care when using The heated seat are canceled
the seat heater, especially for each time the ignition is turned off.
long periods of time. Do not If available, the buttons are on the To use this feature after restarting
place anything on the seat that climate control panel. To operate, the vehicle, press the desired button
insulates against heat, such the ignition must be on. again.
as a blanket, cushion, cover, Press L or M to heat the driver
or similar item. This may cause or passenger seat cushion and
the seat heater to overheat. seatback.
An overheated seat heater
may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.

Rear Seats
Rear Seats (Split Folding)
Flip and Fold Feature
On vehicles with this feature, the
seat cushions flip forward and the
seatbacks fold down to create an
extended flat cargo area.
To flip the seat cushion and fold the
seatback:
1. Make sure the front seats are 2. Flip the seat cushion forward 3. Lower the seatback by pulling
not reclined. The seat cushion by pulling up on the tab in the forward on the tab on the
will not flip forward completely center of the seat cushion where outboard side of the seatback.
if the front seats are reclined. the seatback meets the seat
cushion.

To return the seats to the normal 3. Flip the bottom seat cushion
position: { WARNING back into place. Push down
firmly on the seat cushion to
A safety belt that is improperly
{ WARNING routed, not properly attached,
make sure it is secure.
or twisted will not provide the When the seat is not in use, the
If either seatback is not locked, it seatback should be placed in the
could move forward in a sudden protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could upright, locked position, and the
stop or crash. That could cause seat cushion should be in the down
injury to the person sitting there. be seriously injured. After raising
position.
Always push and pull on the the rear seatback, always check
seatbacks to be sure they are to be sure that the safety belts Under Seat Storage
locked. are properly routed and attached,
The vehicle has a storage area
and are not twisted.
under the rear seat. See Rear
1. Raise the seatback and make Storage on page 42 for more
sure it latches. 2. Make sure the safety belts information.
are properly stowed over the
seatback in all three seating
positions.

Safety Belts In most states and in all Canadian

{ WARNING provinces, the law requires wearing
This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why:
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be in
properly. It also describes some
of a vehicle. In a collision, people a crash. If you do have a crash,
things not to do with safety belts.
riding in these areas are more you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
{ WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some
Do not let anyone ride where in any area of your vehicle that crashes can be so serious that even
a safety belt cannot be worn is not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not
properly. In a crash, if you or safety belts. Be sure everyone survive. But most crashes are in
your passenger(s) are not in the vehicle is in a seat and between. In many of them, people
wearing safety belts, the injuries using a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and
can be much worse. You can hit sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
things inside the vehicle harder This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed.
or be ejected from the vehicle. reminder to buckle the safety belts.
You and your passenger(s) can See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety
be seriously injured or killed. page 514 for additional information. belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In the same crash, you might In most crashes buckling up does
not be, if you are buckled up. matter ... a lot!
Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.

The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down
vehicle, it could be the windshield... as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers About Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Q: If I am a good driver, and I
Safety Belts should I have to wear safety never drive far from home,
belts? why should I wear safety
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts?
after a crash if I am wearing a A: Airbags are supplemental
safety belt? systems only; so they work A: You may be an excellent driver,
with safety belts not instead but if you are in a crash even
A: You could be whether you of them. Whether or not an one that is not your fault you
are wearing a safety belt or airbag is provided, all occupants and your passenger(s) can be
not. But your chance of being still have to buckle up to get the hurt. Being a good driver does
conscious during and after an most protection. That is true not not protect you from things
accident, so you can unbuckle only in frontal collisions, but beyond your control, such
and get out, is much greater if especially in side and other as bad drivers.
you are belted. And you can collisions.
unbuckle a safety belt, even if Most accidents occur within
you are upside down. 40 km (25 mi) of home. And
the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur
at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your This could cause serious or even
passenger(s) wear a safety belt, fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
Properly there is important information should go over the shoulder and
This section is only for people of you should know. across the chest. These parts of
adult size. the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety The shoulder belt locks if there is a
belts and children. And there sudden stop or crash.
are different rules for smaller Q: What is wrong with this?
children and infants. If a child
will be riding in the vehicle, see
Older Children on page 342 or
Infants and Young Children on
page 345. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more Sit up straight and always keep
often in crashes than those who your feet on the floor in front of you.
are wearing safety belts. The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips,
Occupants who are not buckled up just touching the thighs. In a crash,
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a this applies force to the strong
crash. And they can strike others in pelvic bones and you would be less A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
the vehicle who are wearing safety likely to slide under the lap belt. It will not give as much
belts. If you slid under it, the belt would protection this way.
apply force on your abdomen.

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
crash, you would move forward you could slide under the lap
too much, which could increase belt and apply force on your
injury. The shoulder belt should fit abdomen. This could cause
snugly against your body. serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips,
just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose.

It will not give nearly as much
protection this way.

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
the belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the
belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would
be there, not on the pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle the belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest.

buckle.

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured You can be seriously injured
if the belt goes over an armrest if you wear the shoulder belt
like this. The belt would be much under your arm. In a crash, your
too high. In a crash, you can body would move too far forward,
slide under the belt. The belt which would increase the chance
force would then be applied on of head and neck injury. Also,
the abdomen, not on the pelvic the belt would apply too much
bones, and that could cause force to the ribs, which are not
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure as strong as shoulder bones.
the belt goes under the armrests. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
A: The shoulder belt is worn under spleen. The shoulder belt should
the arm. It should be worn over go over the shoulder and across
the shoulder at all times. the chest.

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the
shoulder belt. Your body could
move too far forward increasing
the chance of head and neck
injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied
right on the abdomen. That could
A: The belt is behind the body. cause serious or fatal injuries. A: The belt is twisted across
The shoulder belt should go over the body.
the shoulder and across the
chest.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

{ WARNING the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
not have the full width of the belt you pull the belt across you very
to spread impact forces. If a belt quickly. If this happens, let the
is twisted, make it straight so it belt go back slightly to unlock it.
can work properly, or ask your Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
dealer to fix it.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out
Lap-Shoulder Belt all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
All seating positions in the vehicle buckle until it clicks.
have a lap-shoulder belt except for If this happens, let the belt go
the center front passenger position back all the way and start again. If the latch plate will not go fully
(if equipped), which has a lap belt. Engaging the child restraint into the buckle, check if the
See Lap Belt on page 323 for more locking feature in the right front correct buckle is being used.
information. seating position may affect the Pull up on the latch plate to
The following instructions explain passenger sensing system. make sure it is secure. If the belt
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt See Passenger Sensing System is not long enough, see Safety
properly. on page 334. Belt Extender on page 324.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Position the release button on
adjustable, so you can sit up the buckle so that the safety belt
straight. To see how, see Seats could be quickly unbuckled if
in the Index. necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

belt height adjuster, move
The vehicle has shoulder belt height
it to the height that is right
adjusters for the driver and right
for you. See Shoulder Belt
front passenger positions.
Height Adjuster in this section
for instructions on use and Adjust the height so the shoulder
important safety information. portion of the belt is on the
shoulder and not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to, but
not contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button See How to Wear Safety Belts
on the buckle. The belt should Properly on page 314.
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure
the belt is out of the way. If a door
is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.

Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort

This vehicle has safety belt Guides
pretensioners for front outboard This vehicle may have rear
occupants. Although the safety shoulder belt comfort guides for
belt pretensioners cannot be seen, each outboard passenger position
they are part of the safety belt in the rear seat. If not, they are
assembly. They can help tighten available through your dealer.
the safety belts during the early The guides may provide added
stages of a moderate to severe safety belt comfort for older children
frontal and near frontal crash who have outgrown booster seats
if the threshold conditions for and for some adults. When installed
pretensioner activation are met. and properly adjusted, the comfort
Squeeze the buttons (A) on the And, if the vehicle has side impact guide positions the belt away from
sides of the height adjuster and airbags, safety belt pretensioners the neck and head.
move the height adjuster to the can help tighten the safety belts
Here is how to install a comfort
desired position. in a side crash.
guide to the safety belt:
You can move the adjuster up just Pretensioners work only once.
1. Pull the guide out from the
by pushing up on the shoulder belt If the pretensioners activate in a
pocket on the edge of the
guide. crash, they will need to be replaced,
seatback.
and probably other new parts for
After the adjuster is set to the
the vehicle's safety belt system.
desired position, try to move it
See Replacing Safety Belt System
down without squeezing the buttons
Parts After a Crash on page 325.
to make sure it has locked into
position.

{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. Be sure that the belt is
and insert the two edges of the not twisted and it lies flat.
belt into the slots of the guide. The elastic cord must be under
the belt and the guide on top.

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Lap Belt
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
4. Buckle, position, and release belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on
the safety belt as described page 319.
previously in this section. Make
The vehicle may have a center
sure the shoulder portion of the
seating position. When you sit in
belt is on the shoulder and not
the center front seating position,
falling off of it. The belt should
you have a lap safety belt, which
be close to, but not contacting,
has no retractor.
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges A pregnant woman should wear
together so that the safety belt a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
can be removed from the guide. portion should be worn as low
Slide the guide into the storage as possible, below the rounding,
pocket on the edge of the seatback. throughout the pregnancy.

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch To make the belt shorter, pull its free seat it is made to fit. The extender
plate and pull it along the belt. end as shown until the belt is snug. has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats.
Buckle, position, and release it the If the belt is not long enough, see To wear it, attach it to the regular
same way as the lap part of a Safety Belt Extender on page 324. safety belt. For more information,
lap-shoulder belt. Make sure the release button on the see the instruction sheet that comes
buckle is positioned so you would with the extender.
be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.

Safety System Check Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt

Now and then, check that the Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts After a
safety belt reminder light, safety Crash
belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors, and anchorages are
{ WARNING
working properly. Look for any Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
{ WARNING
other loose or damaged safety It may severely weaken them. A crash can damage the safety
belt system parts that might keep In a crash, they might not be able belt system in the vehicle.
a safety belt system from doing to provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system
its job. See your dealer to have Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the
it repaired. Torn or frayed safety soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in
belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact serious injury or even death
forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, in a crash. To help make sure
get a new one right away. the safety belt systems are
working properly after a crash,
Make sure the safety belt reminder have them inspected and any
light is working. See Safety Belt necessary replacements made
Reminders on page 514 for more as soon as possible.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
After a minor crash, replacement of
See Safety Belt Care on page 325.
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.

See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System For frontal airbags, the word
belt assemblies inspected or AIRBAG will appear on the middle
replaced. The vehicle has the following part of the steering wheel for the
airbags: driver and on the instrument panel
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver. for the right front passenger.
system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the right front With seatmounted side impact
time of the crash. passenger. airbags, the word AIRBAG will
Have the safety belt pretensioners appear on the side of the seatback
. A seatmounted side impact closest to the door.
checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the driver.
crash, or if the airbag readiness light With roof-rail airbags, the word
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seatmounted side impact AIRBAG will appear along the
or while you are driving. See Airbag airbag for the right front headliner or trim.
Readiness Light on page 515. passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver the protection provided by safety
and passenger directly behind belts. Even though today's airbags
the driver. are also designed to help reduce
. A roof-rail airbag for the right the risk of injury from the force of
front passenger and passenger an inflating bag, all airbags must
seated directly behind the right inflate very quickly to do their job.
front passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.

Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
{ WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
You can be severely injured or Anyone who is up against, or when it inflates can be seriously
killed in a crash if you are not very close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt even inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
if you have airbags. Airbags are or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety close to any airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle safety belt
Also, airbags are not designed to of the seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system
deploy in every crash. In some Safety belts help keep you in is designed for them. Young
crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a children and infants need the
restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear a safety belt, protection that a child restraint
Airbag Inflate? on page 330. even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of the vehicle. To read how, see
crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. Older Children on page 342 or
of hitting things inside the vehicle Infants and Young Children on
or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on
or sleep against the door or side page 345.
are supplemental restraints to
the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.

Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag The right front passenger frontal
Readiness Light on page 515 airbag is in the instrument panel on
for more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side.
middle of the steering wheel.

WARNING (Continued)
that person causing severe

injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Driver Side Shown, Driver Side Shown, Do not use seat accessories
Passenger Side Similar Passenger Side Similar that block the inflation path of a
The seatmounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver, seat-mounted side impact airbag.
airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, and second
Never secure anything to the
passenger are in the side of the row outboard passengers are in the
roof of a vehicle with roof-rail
seatbacks closest to the door. ceiling above the side windows.
airbags by routing a rope or tie
down through any door or window
{ WARNING opening. If you do, the path of an
If something is between an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
occupant and an airbag, the blocked.
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)

When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate Thresholds can also vary with
at different crash speeds. specific vehicle design.
Inflate? For example: Frontal airbags are not intended to
Frontal airbags are designed . If the vehicle hits a stationary inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
to inflate in moderate to severe object, the airbags could inflate impacts, or in many side impacts.
frontal or near-frontal crashes at a different crash speed than if
to help reduce the potential for In addition, the vehicle has
the vehicle hits a moving object. dual-stage frontal airbags.
severe injuries mainly to the
driver's or right front passenger's . If the vehicle hits an object that Dual-stage airbags adjust the
head and chest. However, they deforms, the airbags could restraint according to crash severity.
are only designed to inflate if the inflate at a different crash speed The vehicle has electronic frontal
impact exceeds a predetermined than if the vehicle hits an object sensors, which help the sensing
deployment threshold. Deployment that does not deform. system distinguish between a
thresholds are used to predict how . If the vehicle hits a narrow object moderate frontal impact and a
severe a crash is likely to be in time (like a pole), the airbags could more severe frontal impact.
for the airbags to inflate and help inflate at a different crash speed For moderate frontal impacts,
restrain the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide dual-stage airbags inflate at a
object (like a wall). level less than full deployment.
Whether the frontal airbags will For more severe frontal impacts,
or should deploy is not based on . If the vehicle goes into an object full deployment occurs.
how fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could
It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed
the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight
quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object.

The vehicle has seat-mounted In any particular crash, no one What Makes an Airbag
side impact and roof-rail airbags. can say whether an airbag should
See Airbag System on page 326. have inflated simply because of
Inflate?
Seat-mounted side impact and the damage to a vehicle or because In a deployment event, the sensing
roof-rail airbags are intended to of what the repair costs were. system sends an electrical signal
inflate in moderate to severe side For frontal airbags, inflation is triggering a release of gas from the
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact determined by what the vehicle hits, inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the angle of the impact, and how airbag causing the bag to break out
the crash severity is above the quickly the vehicle slows down. of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
system's designed threshold level. For seat-mounted side impact and the airbag, and related hardware are
The threshold level can vary with roof-rail airbags, deployment is all part of the airbag module.
specific vehicle design. determined by the location and
Frontal airbag modules are
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to severity of the side impact.
located inside the steering wheel
inflate in rollovers or rear impacts. and instrument panel. For vehicles
A seat-mounted side impact airbag with seatmounted side impact
is intended to deploy on the side airbags, there are airbags modules
of the vehicle that is struck. Both in the side of the front seatbacks
roof-rail airbags will deploy when closest to the door. For vehicles
either side of the vehicle is struck. with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that
have occupant seating positions.

How Does an Airbag body, stopping the occupant more What Will You See After
gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
Restrain? and roof-rail airbags distribute the
an Airbag Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or force of the impact more evenly After the frontal airbags and
near frontal collisions, even belted over the occupant's upper body. seat-mounted side impact airbags
occupants can contact the steering But airbags would not help in inflate, they quickly deflate, so
wheel or the instrument panel. In many types of collisions, primarily quickly that some people may not
moderate to severe side collisions, because the occupant's motion even realize an airbag inflated.
even belted occupants can contact is not toward those airbags. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
the inside of the vehicle. See When Should an Airbag partially inflated for some time after
Airbags supplement the Inflate? on page 330 for more they deploy. Some components of
protection provided by safety information. the airbag module may be hot for
belts. Frontal airbags distribute several minutes. For location of the
Airbags should never be regarded airbag modules, see What Makes
the force of the impact more as anything more than a supplement
evenly over the occupant's upper an Airbag Inflate? on page 331.
to safety belts.

The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming breathing problems but cannot A crash severe enough to
from the vents in the deflated get out of the vehicle after an inflate the airbags may have
airbags. Airbag inflation does not airbag inflates, then get fresh air also damaged important functions
prevent the driver from seeing out by opening a window or a door. in the vehicle, such as the fuel
of the windshield or being able to If you experience breathing system, brake and steering
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent problems following an airbag systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
people from leaving the vehicle. deployment, you should seek appears to be drivable after a
medical attention. moderate crash, there may be
{ WARNING concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
When an airbag inflates, there The vehicle has a feature that may the vehicle.
may be dust in the air. This dust automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard Use caution if you should attempt
could cause breathing problems to restart the engine after a crash
warning flashers, and shut off the
for people with a history of has occurred.
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
asthma or other breathing trouble.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
To avoid this, everyone in the interior lamps and hazard warning
vehicle should get out as soon flashers by using the controls for
as it is safe to do so. If you have those features.
(Continued)


. The vehicle has a crash
In many crashes severe enough
sensing and diagnostic module
Passenger Sensing
to inflate the airbag, windshields
are broken by vehicle deformation. which records information after System
Additional windshield breakage a crash. See Vehicle Data The vehicle has a passenger
may also occur from the right front Recording and Privacy on sensing system for the right front
passenger airbag. page 1315 and Event Data passenger position. The passenger
Recorders on page 1316. airbag status indicator will be visible
. Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians on the instrument panel when the
inflates, you will need some work on the airbag systems. vehicle is started.
new parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean
If you do not get them, the that an airbag system will
airbag system will not be there not work properly. See your
to help protect you in another dealer for service.
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual United States
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.

The passenger sensing system will According to accident statistics,

turn off the right front passenger children are safer when properly
frontal airbag under certain secured in a rear seat in the correct
conditions. The driver airbag, child restraint for their weight
seatmounted side impact airbags, and size.
and roofrail airbags are not affected We recommend that children be
Canada by the passenger sensing system. secured in a rear seat, including:
The words ON and OFF, or the The passenger sensing system an infant or a child riding in a
symbol for on and off, will be works with sensors that are part rear-facing child restraint; a child
visible during the system check. of the right front passenger seat. riding in a forward-facing child seat;
If you are using remote start to The sensors are designed to detect an older child riding in a booster
start the vehicle from a distance, the presence of a properly-seated seat; and children, who are large
if equipped, you may not see the occupant and determine if the enough, using safety belts.
system check. When the system right front passenger frontal airbag
check is complete, either the should be enabled (may inflate)
word ON or the word OFF, or the or not.
symbol for on or off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 516.

A label on the sun visor says, The passenger sensing system is

Never put a rear-facing child seat WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front
in the front. This is because the risk passenger frontal airbag if:
to the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
. The right front passenger seat is
if the airbag deploys. unoccupied.
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one
{ WARNING can guarantee that an airbag will
. The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
A child in a rear-facing child not deploy under some unusual restraint.
restraint can be seriously circumstance, even though the . A right front passenger takes
injured or killed if the right airbag is turned off. his/her weight off of the seat for
front passenger airbag inflates. Secure rear-facing child a period of time.
This is because the back of the restraints in a rear seat, even if . Or, if there is a critical problem
rear-facing child restraint would the airbag is off. If you secure a with the airbag system or the
be very close to the inflating forward-facing child restraint in passenger sensing system.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing the right front seat, always move
child restraint can be seriously When the passenger sensing
the front passenger seat as far system has turned off the right front
injured or killed if the right front back as it will go. It is better to passenger frontal airbag, the off
passenger airbag inflates and secure the child restraint in a indicator will light and stay lit to
the passenger seat is in a rear seat. remind you that the airbag is off.
forward position. See Passenger Airbag Status
(Continued) Indicator on page 516.

The passenger sensing system is If the On Indicator is Lit for a

designed to turn on (may inflate) { WARNING Child Restraint
the right front passenger frontal
airbag anytime the system senses If the airbag readiness light ever If a child restraint has been installed
that a person of adult size is sitting comes on and stays on, it means and the on indicator is lit:
properly in the right front passenger that something may be wrong 1. Turn the vehicle off.
seat. When the passenger sensing with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, 2. Remove the child restraint from
system has allowed the airbag to be
have the vehicle serviced right the vehicle.
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the away. See Airbag Readiness 3. Remove any additional items
airbag is active. Light on page 515 for more from the seat such as blankets,
information, including important cushions, seat covers, seat
For some children, including
safety information. heaters, or seat massagers.
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger 4. Reinstall the child restraint
sensing system may or may not following the directions
turn off the right front passenger provided by the child restraint
frontal airbag, depending upon manufacturer and refer to
the person's seating posture Securing Child Restraints (Rear
and body build. Everyone in the Seat Position) on page 357
vehicle who has outgrown child or Securing Child Restraints
restraints should wear a safety (Center Front Seat Position) on
belt properly whether or not page 359 or Securing Child
there is an airbag for that person. Restraints (Right Front Seat
Position) on page 359.

5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an system to detect that person and
restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant enable the right front passenger
vehicle, the on indicator is frontal airbag:
still lit, turn the vehicle off. 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat 2. Remove any additional material
cushion, if adjustable, to make from the seat, such as blankets,
sure that the vehicle seatback cushions, seat covers, seat
is not pushing the child restraint heaters, or seat massagers.
into the seat cushion. 3. Place the seatback in the fully
Also make sure the child upright position.
restraint is not trapped under 4. Have the person sit upright in
the vehicle head restraint. the seat, centered on the seat
If this happens, adjust the cushion, with legs comfortably
head restraint. See Head extended.
Restraints on page 32. If a person of adult-size is sitting 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
6. Restart the vehicle. in the right front passenger seat, person remain in this position for
but the off indicator is lit, it could be two to three minutes after the on
The passenger sensing system may
because that person is not sitting indicator is lit.
or may not turn off the airbag for a
properly in the seat. If this happens,
child in a child restraint depending
use the following steps to allow the
upon the child's seating posture and
body build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.

Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if
System Operation performance of the passenger an object, such as a briefcase,
sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
Safety belts help keep the other electronic device, is put on
passenger in position on the . The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger an unoccupied seat. If this is not
seat during vehicle maneuvers desired, remove the object from
and braking, which helps the airbag when liquid is soaked
into the seat. If this happens, the seat.
passenger sensing system
maintain the passenger airbag the off indicator will be lit, and
status. See Safety Belts and the airbag readiness light on the { WARNING
Child Restraints in the Index for instrument panel will also be lit.
Stowing of articles under the
additional information about the . Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the
importance of proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and
A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the
such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will enable proper operation of the passenger
or aftermarket equipment such (turn on) the passenger airbag
sensing system.
as seat covers, seat heaters, and while a child restraint or child
seat massagers can affect how occupant is on the seat. If the
well the passenger sensing system passenger airbag is turned on,
operates. We recommend that the on indicator will be lit.
you not use seat covers or other If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
aftermarket equipment except when the seat immediately. If the airbag
approved by GM for your specific readiness light is lit, do not install
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to a child restraint or allow anyone
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on to occupy the seat. See Airbag
page 340 for more information Readiness Light on page 515
about modifications that can affect for important safety information.
how the system operates.

Servicing the Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
{ WARNING Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle For up to 10 seconds after the Q: Is there anything I might add
should be serviced. There are ignition is turned off and the to or change about the vehicle
parts of the airbag system in battery is disconnected, an airbag that could keep the airbags
several places around the vehicle. can still inflate during improper from working properly?
Your dealer and the service manual service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it A: Yes. If you add things that
have information about servicing change the vehicle's frame,
the vehicle and the airbag system. inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
bumper system, height, front
To purchase a service manual, see They are probably part of the
end or side sheet metal, they
Service Publications Ordering airbag system. Be sure to follow
may keep the airbag system
Information on page 1313. proper service procedures, and from working properly. Changing
make sure the person performing or moving any parts of the front
work for you is qualified to do so. seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the
airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has a If you have any questions, In addition, your dealer and the
passenger sensing system call Customer Assistance. service manual have information
for the right front passenger The phone numbers and about the location of the airbag
position, which includes sensors addresses for Customer sensors, sensing and diagnostic
that are part of the passenger's Assistance are in Step Two module and airbag wiring.
seat. The passenger sensing of the Customer Satisfaction
system may not operate properly Procedure in this manual. Airbag System Check
if the original seat trim is See Customer Satisfaction
replaced with non-GM covers, Procedure on page 131. The airbag system does not need
upholstery or trim, or with regularly scheduled maintenance
Q: Because I have a disability, or replacement. Make sure the
GM covers, upholstery or I have to get my vehicle
trim designed for a different airbag readiness light is working.
modified. How can I find out See Airbag Readiness Light on
vehicle. Any object, such as whether this will affect my
an aftermarket seat heater or page 515 for more information.
airbag system?
a comfort enhancing pad or Notice: If an airbag covering is
device, installed under or on A: If you have questions, damaged, opened, or broken,
top of the seat fabric, could call Customer Assistance. the airbag may not work properly.
also interfere with the operation The phone numbers and Do not open or break the airbag
of the passenger sensing addresses for Customer coverings. If there are any
system. This could either Assistance are in Step Two opened or broken airbag covers,
prevent proper deployment of the Customer Satisfaction have the airbag covering and/or
of the passenger airbag(s) or Procedure in this manual. airbag module replaced. For the
prevent the passenger sensing See Customer Satisfaction location of the airbag modules,
system from properly turning Procedure on page 131. see What Makes an Airbag
off the passenger airbag(s). Inflate? on page 331. See your
See Passenger Sensing dealer for service.
System on page 334.

Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need Child Restraints
to replace airbag system parts.
Parts After a Crash See your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ WARNING
after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly.
A damaged airbag system Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
may not work properly and
on page 515 for more information.
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon Older children who have outgrown
as possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions that

. Does the lap belt fit low and Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort
come with the booster seat state the snug on the hips, touching the Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
weight and height limitations for that thighs? If yes, continue. If no, page 319.
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,
lap-shoulder belt until the child . Can proper safety belt fit be children and infants are safer
passes the fit test below: maintained for the length of when properly restrained in a child
. Sit all the way back on the seat. the trip? If yes, continue. If no, restraint system or infant restraint
Do the knees bend at the seat return to the booster seat. system secured in a rear seating
edge? If yes, continue. If no, Q: What is the proper way to position.
return to the booster seat. wear safety belts? In a crash, children who are not
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. A: An older child should wear a buckled up can strike other people
Does the shoulder belt rest on lap-shoulder belt and get the who are buckled up, or can be
the shoulder? If yes, continue. additional restraint a shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older
If no, try using the rear safety belt can provide. The shoulder children need to use safety belts
belt comfort guide. See Rear belt should not cross the face properly.
Safety Belt Comfort Guides or neck. The lap belt should
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on fit snugly below the hips, just
page 319 for more information. touching the top of the thighs.
If the shoulder belt still does not This applies belt force to the
rest on the shoulder, then return child's pelvic bones in a crash.
to the booster seat. It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never do this. forward increasing the chance of
Never allow two children to wear head and neck injury. The child
the same safety belt. The safety might also slide under the lap
belt can not properly spread the belt. The belt force would then
impact forces. In a crash, the two be applied right on the abdomen.
children can be crushed together That could cause serious or fatal
and seriously injured. A safety injuries. The shoulder belt should
belt must be used by only one go over the shoulder and across
person at a time. the chest.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
(Continued)

Infants and Young Airbags plus lapshoulder belts

WARNING (Continued)
offer protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag infant will suddenly become
and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride person's arms. An infant should
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the be secured in an appropriate
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate restraint.
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt Never hold an infant or a child
is wrapped around their neck while riding in a vehicle. Due to
and the safety belt continues crash forces, an infant or a child
to tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only
safety belts. (Continued)

For most basic types of child

{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available.
Never do this. When purchasing a child
Children who are up against, restraint, be sure it is designed
or very close to, any airbag when to be used in a motor vehicle.
it inflates can be seriously injured If it is, the restraint will have a
or killed. Never put a rear-facing label saying that it meets federal
child restraint in the right front motor vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there
child restraint in the right front A: Add-on child restraints, which are many kinds of restraints
seat, always move the front are purchased by the vehicle available for children with
passenger seat as far back special needs.
owner, are available in four
as it will go. basic types. Selection of a
particular restraint should
take into consideration not
only the child's weight, height,
and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible
with the motor vehicle in which
it will be used.

Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low
because an infant's neck is not on the hip bones, as it should.
fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a
an infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during (A) RearFacing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should a crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.

Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of in this manual.
body with the harness. the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a To help reduce the chance of
child to see out the window. injury, the child restraint must
be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH System) on

Children can be endangered in a In some areas, Certified Child Where to Put the
crash if the child restraint is not Passenger Safety Technicians
properly secured in the vehicle. (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Restraint
When securing an add-on child and demonstrate how to correctly According to accident statistics,
restraint, refer to the instructions use and install child restraints. children and infants are safer
that come with the restraint which In the U.S., refer to the when properly restrained in a child
may be on the restraint itself or in a National Highway Traffic Safety restraint system or infant restraint
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Administration (NHTSA) website system secured in a rear seating
The child restraint instructions to locate the nearest child safety position.
are important, so if they are not seat inspection station. For CPST
We recommend that children and
available, obtain a replacement availability in Canada, check with
child restraints be secured in a rear
copy from the manufacturer. Transport Canada or the Provincial
seat, including: an infant or a child
Ministry of Transportation office.
Keep in mind that an unsecured riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
child restraint can move around in a Securing the Child within the a child riding in a forward-facing
collision or sudden stop and injure Child Restraint child seat; an older child riding in a
people in the vehicle. Be sure to booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle even when no
{ WARNING
child is in it. A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.

A label on your sun visor says,

Never put a rear-facing child seat WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
in the front. This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing A child in a child restraint in the
if the airbag deploys. system, if equipped, has center front seat can be badly
turned off the right front injured or killed by the frontal
passenger frontal airbag, no airbags if they inflate. Never
{ WARNING system is fail-safe. No one secure a child restraint in the
A child in a rear-facing child can guarantee that an airbag center front seat. It is always
restraint can be seriously will not deploy under some better to secure a child restraint
injured or killed if the right unusual circumstance, even in a rear seat.
front passenger airbag inflates. though it is turned off.
This is because the back of the Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not use child restraints in the
rear-facing child restraint would in a rear seat, even if the center front seat position.
be very close to the inflating airbag is off. If you secure a When securing a child restraint in
airbag. A child in a forward-facing forward-facing child restraint in a rear seating position, study the
child restraint can be seriously the right front seat, always move instructions that came with your
injured or killed if the right front the front passenger seat as far child restraint to make sure it is
passenger airbag inflates and the back as it will go. It is better to compatible with this vehicle.
passenger seat is in a forward secure the child restraint in a
position. Child restraints and booster seats
rear seat. vary considerably in size, and some
The vehicle may have a See Passenger Sensing System may fit in certain seating positions
passenger sensing system on page 334 for additional better than others. Always make
which is designed to turn off information. sure the child restraint is properly
the right front passenger frontal secured.
airbag under certain conditions.
(Continued)

Depending on where you place Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint
the child restraint and the size of with a top tether, you must also
the child restraint, you may not
Tethers for Children use either the lower anchors or the
be able to access adjacent safety (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
for additional passengers or child restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
restraints. Adjacent seating This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH
child restraint prevents access to The LATCH system uses anchors in system in your vehicle, you need
or interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the a child restraint that has LATCH
safety belt. child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
Wherever a child restraint is with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with
installed, be sure to secure the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the
child restraint properly. child restraint is properly installed child restraint and its attachments.
Keep in mind that an unsecured using the anchors, or use the The following explains how to
child restraint can move around in a vehicle's safety belts to secure the attach a child restraint with these
collision or sudden stop and injure restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle.
people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
properly secure any child restraint in also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
your vehicle even when no child and attachments or top tether
is in it. anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have
a top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
Lower anchors (A) are metal A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
bars built into the vehicle. There top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether
are two lower anchors for each vehicle. A top tether anchor is be attached. Be sure to read and
LATCH seating position that will built into the vehicle. The top tether follow the instructions for your child
accommodate a child restraint attachment (B) on the child restraint restraint.
with lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor
in the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
To assist you in locating the lower To assist you in locating the top
anchors, each seating position with tether anchors, the top tether anchor
lower anchors has two labels, near symbol is located on the cover.
the crease between the seatback The top tether anchors are located
and the seat cushion. under the covers on the rear
seatback filler panel behind each
head restraint. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of
Rear Seat the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating placed.
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.

Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH { WARNING
System Do not attach more than one
child restraint to a single anchor.
{ WARNING Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment
not attached to anchors, the child to come loose or even break
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others
the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the
child could be seriously injured risk of serious or fatal injuries
or killed. Install a LATCH-type during a crash, attach only one
Do not secure a child restraint in a child restraint properly using child restraint per anchor.
position without a top tether anchor the anchors, or use the vehicle
if a national or local law requires safety belts to secure the
that the top tether be attached, or restraint, following the instructions
if the instructions that come with that came with the child restraint
the child restraint say that the top and the instructions in this
tether must be attached. manual.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 349 for
additional information.

Do not fold the empty rear 1.2. Put the child restraint on
{ WARNING seat with a safety belt buckled. the seat.
This could damage the safety 1.3. Attach and tighten the
Children can be seriously injured belt or the seat. Unbuckle and
or strangled if a shoulder belt lower attachments on the
return the safety belt to its child restraint to the lower
is wrapped around their neck stowed position, before folding
and the safety belt continues to anchors.
the seat.
tighten. Buckle any unused safety 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
belts behind the child restraint 1. Attach and tighten the recommends that the top tether
lower attachments to the be attached, attach and tighten
so children cannot reach them.
lower anchors. If the child the top tether to the top tether
Pull the shoulder belt all the way
restraint does not have lower anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
out of the retractor to set the lock, attachments or the desired
if the vehicle has one, after the child restraint instructions and
seating position does not have the following steps:
child restraint has been installed. lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH the safety belts. Refer to your 2.2. Push on the depression
attachments rub against the child restraint manufacturer at the rear of the cover
vehicles safety belts. This may instructions and the instructions and swing the lid open
damage these parts. If necessary, in this manual. to expose the top tether
move buckled safety belts to 1.1. Find the lower anchors anchor.
avoid rubbing the LATCH for the desired seating
attachments. position.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten Replacing LATCH System

the top tether according
to your child restraint
Parts After a Crash
instructions and the
following instructions: { WARNING
A crash can damage the
LATCH system in the vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
If the position you are using not properly secure the child
has a fixed headrest and restraint, resulting in serious
you are using a dual tether, injury or even death in a crash.
route the tether around the To help make sure the LATCH
head restraint. system is working properly after
a crash, see your dealer to have
3. Before placing a child in the
If the position you are child restraint, make sure the system inspected and any
using has a fixed headrest it is securely held in place. necessary replacements made
and you are using a single To check, grasp the child as soon as possible.
tether, route the tether over restraint at the LATCH path
the head restraint. and attempt to move it If the vehicle has the LATCH system
sidetoside and backandforth. and it was being used during a
There should be no more than crash, new LATCH system parts
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement, may be needed.
for proper installation.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at
the time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints Do not secure a child seat in a If more than one child restraint
position without a top tether anchor needs to be installed in the rear
(Rear Seat Position) if a national or local law requires seat, be sure to read Where to
When securing a child restraint in that the top tether be anchored, Put the Restraint on page 349.
a rear seating position, study the or if the instructions that come with 1. Put the child restraint on
instructions that came with the the child restraint say that the top the seat.
child restraint to make sure it is strap must be anchored.
compatible with this vehicle. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
In Canada, the law requires that the lap and shoulder portions of
If the child restraint has the LATCH forward-facing child restraints have the vehicle safety belt through or
system, see Lower Anchors and a top tether, and that the tether be around the restraint. The child
Tethers for Children (LATCH attached. restraint instructions will show
System) on page 351 for how and If the child restraint does not have you how.
where to install the child restraint the LATCH system, you will be
using LATCH. If a child restraint using the safety belt to secure
is secured in the vehicle using a the child restraint in this position.
safety belt and it uses a top tether, Be sure to follow the instructions
see Lower Anchors and Tethers that came with the child restraint.
for Children (LATCH System) on Secure the child in the child restraint
page 351 for top tether anchor when and as the instructions say.
locations.

3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints Securing Child Restraints
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Center Front Seat (Right Front Seat
regarding the use of the top Position) Position)
tether. See Lower Anchors and This vehicle has airbags. A rear
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 351 for more
{ WARNING seat is a safer place to secure
a forward-facing child restraint.
information. A child in a child restraint in the See Where to Put the Restraint on
7. Before placing a child in the center front seat can be badly page 349.
child restraint, make sure it is injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never In addition, the vehicle has a
securely held in place. To check, passenger sensing system which
grasp the child restraint at the secure a child restraint in the
is designed to turn off the right
safety belt path and attempt center front seat. It is always
front passenger frontal airbag under
to move it sidetoside and better to secure a child restraint
certain conditions. See Passenger
backandforth. When the child in a rear seat. Sensing System on page 334 and
restraint is properly installed, Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
there should be no more than on page 516 for more information,
Do not use child restraints in the
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. including important safety
center front seat position.
To remove the child restraint, information.
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.

A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH
Never put a rear-facing child seat WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
in the front. This is because the risk Tethers for Children (LATCH
to the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing System) on page 351 for how and
if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the right where to install the child restraint
front passenger frontal airbag, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
no system is fail-safe. No one
{ WARNING can guarantee that an airbag will
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see for top tether
A child in a rear-facing child not deploy under some unusual anchor locations.
restraint can be seriously circumstance, even though it is
Do not secure a child seat in a
injured or killed if the right turned off. position without a top tether anchor
front passenger airbag inflates. Secure rear-facing child if a national or local law requires
This is because the back of the restraints in a rear seat, even if that the top tether be anchored, or if
rear-facing child restraint would the airbag is off. If you secure a the instructions that come with the
be very close to the inflating forward-facing child restraint in child restraint say that the top strap
airbag. A child in a forward-facing the right front seat, always move must be anchored.
child restraint can be seriously the front passenger seat as far In Canada, the law requires that
injured or killed if the right front back as it will go. It is better to forward-facing child restraints have
passenger airbag inflates and the secure the child restraint in a a top tether, and that the tether be
passenger seat is in a forward rear seat. attached.
position.
See Passenger Sensing System
(Continued) on page 334 for additional
information.

You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal
airbag, the off indicator on
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
lit when the vehicle is started. buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
See Passenger Airbag Status Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
Indicator on page 516. the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat. necessary.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.

7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt
to move it sidetoside and
backandforth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator
in the passenger airbag status
6. To tighten the belt, push down indicator will come on and stay on
on the child restraint, pull the when the vehicle is started.
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see
and feed the shoulder belt back If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, System on page 334 for more
it may be helpful to use your information.
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of the let it return to the stowed position.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 5 and 6.

Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Sunglasses Storage

Compartments A storage compartment for
sunglasses may be located above
Storage Compartments the rearview mirror. Push on the
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box cover to open the compartment.
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Lift up on the glove box lever to
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 open it. Armrest Storage
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 For vehicles with a rear seat
Cupholders armrest, pull the tab on the
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Cupholders may be built into the armrest forward to access it.
Additional Storage Features front center console, front portion
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 of the front center seat, and rear
armrest of the vehicle.

4-2 Storage
Rear Storage Additional Storage

For vehicles with a split folding rear Features
seat, there are two storage areas
underneath. Pull the tab(s) located
by the passenger side safety belt
Convenience Net
buckle and the driver side rear For vehicles with a convenience
seat to access the storage areas. net, it is located in the rear. Use it
See Rear Seats (Split Folding) on to store small loads as far forward
page 38 for more information. as possible. The net should not be
used to store heavy loads.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a front center
console storage area, open it by
pulling up on the latch located
in the front of the console cover.
There may be a removable tray
inside.

Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Passenger Airbag Status Vehicle Messages

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Controls Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17
Malfunction Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-31
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Brake System Warning Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Engine Cooling System
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-33
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Electronic Stability Control Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-33
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-34
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 (ESC) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-21
Traction Control System Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-34
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-22 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Indicators Engine Coolant Temperature Ride Control System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-36
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24 Anti-Theft Alarm System
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-36
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5-2 Instruments and Controls
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-38 Controls To adjust the steering wheel:

Vehicle Reminder 1. Hold the wheel and pull the lever
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-38 Steering Wheel toward you.
Adjustment 2. Move the steering wheel up
Vehicle Personalization or down.
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-39
3. Release the lever to lock the
Universal Remote System steering wheel in place.
Universal Remote System . . . 5-45 Do not adjust the steering wheel
Universal Remote System while driving.
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
The tilt wheel lever is located on the

left side of the steering column.

Steering Wheel Controls w (Next): Press to go to the next SRCE (Source): Press to choose
radio station stored as a favorite, between the radio (AM, FM, XM),
or the next track if a CD is playing. CD, and auxiliary input jack.
c x (Previous/End): Press + e e (Volume): Press to
to go to the previous radio station increase or to decrease the radio
stored as a favorite, go to the next volume.
track if a CD is playing, reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
(Seek): Press to go to the next
radio station while in AM, FM,
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press or XM. Press to go to the next
to silence the vehicle speakers track or chapter while sourced to
only. Press again to turn the sound the CD.
on. For vehicles with OnStar
or Bluetooth systems, press
Horn
and hold b g for longer than
Vehicles with audio steering wheel two seconds to interact with those Press near or on the horn symbols
controls could differ depending on on the steering wheel pad to sound
systems. See the OnStar Owner's
the vehicle's options. Some audio the horn.
Guide and Bluetooth on page 721
controls can be adjusted at the for more information.
steering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer 6 (Low Speed): Slow

wipes. { WARNING
? (High Speed): Fast wipes. In freezing weather, do not use
Clear ice and snow from the wiper the washer until the windshield
blades before using them. If frozen is warmed. Otherwise the
to the windshield, carefully loosen or washer fluid can form ice on the
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades windshield, blocking your vision.
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 1031. When the vehicle is low on washer
Heavy snow or ice can overload the fluid, the WASHER FLUID LOW
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will ADD FLUID displays in the Driver
stop the motor until it cools down. Information Center (DIC) for
60 seconds. When the ignition is
Windshield Washer turned off, this message displays
Turn the band with the wiper symbol again for three seconds to remind
to control the windshield wipers. Push the paddle L at the top of
you that the fluid level is low.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn the lever to spray washer fluid on
the windshield. The wipers run for Until the fluid reservoir is refilled,
to 8, then release. Several wipes, several sweeps and then either every time the vehicle is started,
hold the band on 8 longer. stop or return to the preset speed. the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
The ignition key must be in FLUID message displays in the
9 (Off): Turns the windshield ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN Driver Information Center (DIC)
wipers off. for 60 seconds. See Washer
for this to work. See Washer
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Fluid on page 1025. Fluid Messages on page 538.
Turn the band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.

Compass If the compass is not set to the zone

where you live, the compass may
This vehicle may have a compass in give false readings. The compass
the Driver Information Center (DIC). must be set to the variance zone
Compass Zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
Your dealer will set the correct zone To adjust for compass variance,
for your location. use the following procedure:
Under certain circumstances, Compass Variance (Zone)
such as during a long distance Procedure
cross-country trip or moving to 1. Do not set the compass zone
a new state or province, it will when the vehicle is moving.
be necessary to compensate for Only set it when the vehicle 2. Find the vehicle's current
compass variance by resetting the is in P (Park). location and variance zone
zone through the DIC if the zone number on the map.
is not set correctly. Press T until PRESS V TO
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE Zones 1 through 15 are
Compass variance is the difference available.
between the earth's magnetic displays.
north and true geographic north. 3. Press V to scroll through
and select the appropriate
variance zone.

4. Press 3 until the vehicle If the DIC display does not show a Do not operate any switches
heading, for example, N for heading, for example, N for North, such as window, sunroof,
North, is displayed in the DIC. or the heading does not change climate controls, seats, etc.
after making turns, there may be during the calibration procedure.
5. If calibration is necessary, a strong magnetic field interfering
calibrate the compass. with the compass. Such interference 2. Press T until PRESS V TO
See Compass Calibration may be caused by a magnetic CB CALIBRATE COMPASS
Procedure following. or cell phone antenna mount, a displays.
Compass Calibration magnetic emergency light, magnetic 3. Press V to start the compass
note pad holder, or any other
The compass can be manually calibration.
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
calibrated. Only calibrate the move the magnetic item, then turn 4. The DIC will display
compass in a magnetically clean on the vehicle and calibrate the CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
and safe location, such as an compass. CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle
open parking lot, where driving in tight circles at less than
the vehicle in circles is not a To calibrate the compass, use the
8 km/h (5 mph) to complete
danger. It is suggested to calibrate following procedure: the calibration. The DIC will
away from tall buildings, utility Compass Calibration Procedure display CALIBRATION
wires, manhole covers, or other COMPLETE for a few seconds
industrial structures, if possible. 1. Before calibrating the compass,
when the calibration is complete.
make sure the compass zone
If CAL should ever appear in the The DIC display will then return
is set to the variance zone in
DIC display, the compass should which the vehicle is located. to PRESS V TO CALIBRATE
be calibrated. See Compass Variance (Zone) COMPASS.
Procedure earlier in this
section.

Clock 3. Press the H button again until With Date Display

the clock display stops flashing Single CD (MP3) Player
Without Date Display to set the currently displayed
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single time, or wait five seconds until This radio has a H button for setting
CD Player the flashing stops and the the time.
current time displayed is
This radio has a H button for setting To set the time and date:
automatically set.
the time. 1. Turn the radio on.
To change the time default setting
To set the time: from 12 hour to 24 hour, press 2. Press the H button and the HR,
1. Press the H button until the hour the H button until 12H or 24H is MIN, MM, DD, and YYYY (hour,
begins flashing on the display. displayed. Once 12H or 24H is minute, month, day, and year)
displayed, turn the f knob to the display.
Press H a second time and the
minutes begin flashing on the desired option to select the setting. 3. Press the pushbutton located
display. Press the H button again to apply under any one of the tabs to be
the setting, or let the screen changed.
2. To increase or decrease the
time out.
time, do one of the following
while the hours or minutes are
flashing:
. Turn the f knob.
. Press SEEK or SEEK.
. Press \ FWD or s REV.

4. To increase the time or date, To change the time default setting Power Outlets
do one of the following: from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
change the date default setting from The vehicle has three 12volt
. Press the pushbutton below outlets which can be used to plug
the selected tab. month/day/year to day/month/year:
in electrical equipment, such as a
. Turn the f knob clockwise. 1. Press the H button and then the cell phone or MP3 player.
pushbutton located under the On vehicles with a center console,
. Press SEEK. forward arrow tab. The time 12H one outlet is located inside the
and 24H, and the date MM/DD/ center floor console and two outlets
. Press \ FWD. YYYY (month, day, and year) are located at the front of the
5. To decrease the time or date, and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, console bin under the instrument
do one of the following: and year) displays. panel.
2. Press the pushbutton located
. Turn the f knob On vehicles without a center
under the desired option. console, two are located under the
counterclockwise.
3. Press the H or MENU button climate controls and another outlet
. Press SEEK. again to apply the selected for the rear seat passengers is at
default, or let the screen the rear of the center front seat.
. Press s REV.
time out.
The date does not automatically
display. To see the date press
the H button while the radio is on.
The date with display times out after
a few seconds and goes back to the
normal radio and time display.

Remove the cover to access and Certain accessory plugs may not Cigarette Lighter
replace when not in use. be compatible with the accessory
power outlet and could overload The vehicle may have a cigarette
lighter. The cigarette lighter may
{ WARNING vehicle and adapter fuses. If a
problem is experienced, see your be located in the console, if the
Power is always supplied to the dealer. vehicle has one; otherwise, it may
outlets. Do not leave electrical be located in the center armrest of
When adding electrical equipment, the front seat.
equipment plugged in when the be sure to follow the proper
vehicle is not in use because the installation instructions included Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
vehicle could catch fire and cause with the equipment. See Add-On in while it is heating does not let
injury or death. Electrical Equipment on page 948. the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Notice: Hanging heavy Damage from overheating can
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment from the power occur to the lighter or heating
equipment plugged in for an outlet can cause damage not element, or a fuse could be
extended period of time while covered by the vehicle warranty. blown. Do not hold a cigarette
the vehicle is off will drain the The power outlets are designed lighter in while it is heating.
battery. Always unplug electrical for accessory power plugs only,
equipment when not in use and such as cell phone charge cords. To use the lighter, just push it in all
do not plug in equipment that the way and let go. When it is ready,
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere it will pop back out by itself.
rating.

Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
The vehicle may have an ashtray. Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
The ashtray may be located in the lights work together to indicate a
console, if the vehicle has one; Indicators problem with the vehicle.
otherwise, it may be located in the Warning lights and gauges can
center armrest of the front seat. When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
Notice: If papers, pins, or other before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
flammable items are put in the to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other replacement. Paying attention to check the section that explains what
smoking materials could ignite the warning lights and gauges to do. Follow this manual's advice.
them and possibly damage the could prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
vehicle. Never put flammable Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
items in the ashtray. could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.

Instrument Cluster
English Uplevel Shown, Base and Metric Similar

Speedometer If that is not possible, then it will be Fuel Gauge

set at zero and a label must be put
The speedometer shows the on the driver door to show the old
vehicle speed in both kilometers mileage reading of the vehicle when
per hour (km/h) and miles per the new odometer was installed.
hour (mph).
Tachometer
Odometer
The tachometer displays the
The odometer shows how far the engine speed in revolutions
vehicle has been driven in either per minute (rpm).
miles (used in the United States)
or in kilometers (used in Canada). Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant warning area, the vehicle could
odometer. If the odometer displays be damaged, and the damages English
ERROR, it probably has been would not be covered by the
tampered with and the numbers vehicle warranty. Do not operate
might not be accurate. the engine with the tachometer
If the vehicle needs a new odometer in the shaded warning area.
installed, it must be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer.

Here are four things that some Engine Coolant

owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Temperature Gauge
. At the gas station, the gas pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
Metric
half the fuel tank's capacity to
When the ignition is on, the fuel fill the tank.
gauge indicates about how much . The gauge moves a little English
fuel is left in the fuel tank.
when while turning a corner
An arrow on the fuel gauge or speeding up.
indicates the side of the vehicle . The gauge does not go back
the fuel door is on.
to empty when the ignition is
turned off.

Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt

Reminder Light
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light Several seconds after the engine
is started, a chime sounds for
When the engine is started, a chime several seconds to remind the
sounds for several seconds to front passenger to buckle their
remind a driver to fasten the safety safety belt. This only occurs if
belt, unless the driver safety belt is the passenger airbag is enabled.
already buckled. See Passenger Sensing System on
The passenger safety belt reminder
light, located on the instrument
Metric panel, comes on and stays on for
This gauge shows the engine several seconds and then flashes
coolant temperature. If the for several more.
gauge pointer moves toward the
H (United States) or torward The safety belt light comes on and
the shaded thermostat (Canada), stays on for several seconds, then
it means that the engine coolant flashes for several more.
has overheated. If the vehicle has
This chime and light are repeated
been operating under normal driving
if the driver remains unbuckled
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
and the vehicle is in motion. If the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
driver safety belt is already buckled,
soon as possible.
neither the chime nor the light
See Engine Overheating on comes on.

Airbag Readiness Light

{ WARNING
The system checks the airbag's
electrical system for possible If the airbag readiness light stays
malfunctions. If the light stays on after the vehicle is started or
on it indicates there is an electrical comes on while driving, it means
problem. The system check the airbag system might not be
This chime and light are repeated if includes the airbag sensor, the working properly. The airbags in
the passenger remains unbuckled pretensioners, the airbag modules, the vehicle might not inflate in a
and the vehicle is in motion. the wiring and the crash sensing crash, or they could even inflate
If the passenger safety belt is and diagnostic module. For more without a crash. To help avoid
buckled, neither the chime nor information on the airbag system, injury, have the vehicle serviced
the light comes on. see Airbag System on page 326. right away.
The front passenger safety belt
reminder light and chime may If there is a problem with the
turn on if an object is put on airbag system, an airbag Driver
the seat such as a briefcase, Information Center (DIC) message
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or can also come on. See Airbag
other electronic device. To turn off System Messages on page 536
the reminder light and/or chime, for more information.
remove the object from the seat The airbag readiness light flashes
or buckle the safety belt. for a few seconds when the engine
is started. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed immediately.

Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the If, after several seconds, both
passenger airbag status indicator status indicator lights remain on,
Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol or if there are no lights at all, there
The vehicle has the passenger for on and off, for several seconds may be a problem with the lights
sensing system. See Passenger as a system check. If you are using or the passenger sensing system.
Sensing System on page 334 remote start, if equipped, to start See your dealer for service.
for important safety information. the vehicle from a distance, you
The instrument panel has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds,
{ WARNING
the status indicator will light either If the airbag readiness light ever
ON or OFF, or either the on or off comes on and stays on, it means
symbol to let you know the status that something may be wrong
of the right front passenger frontal with the airbag system. To help
airbag. avoid injury to yourself or others,
If the word ON or the on symbol is have the vehicle serviced right
United States lit on the passenger airbag status away. See Airbag Readiness
indicator, it means that the right Light on page 515 for more
front passenger frontal airbag is information, including important
enabled (may inflate). safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
Canada passenger frontal airbag.

Charging System Light The light should go out once Malfunction

the engine starts. If it stays on,
or comes on while driving, there
Indicator Lamp
could be a problem with the A computer system called OBD II
charging system. A charging system (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
message in the Driver Information Generation) monitors operation
Center (DIC) can also appear. of the fuel, ignition, and emission
See Battery Voltage and Charging control systems. It ensures that
Messages on page 530 for more emissions are at acceptable levels
This light comes on briefly when information. This light could indicate for the life of the vehicle, helping
the ignition key is turned to START, that there are problems with a to produce a cleaner environment.
but the engine is not running, as a generator drive belt, or that there
check to show it is working. is an electrical problem. Have it
If it does not, have the vehicle checked right away. If the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
conditioner.
This light should come on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the malfunction indicator lamp Notice: Modifications made to the To prevent more serious damage to
comes on and stays on while the engine, transmission, exhaust, the vehicle:
engine is running, this indicates intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed.
that there is an OBD II problem vehicle or the replacement
and service is required. of the original tires with other . Avoid hard accelerations.
Malfunctions often are indicated by than those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades.
the system before any problem is Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
. If towing a trailer, reduce the
apparent. Being aware of the light amount of cargo being hauled
can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this
light to come on. Modifications as soon as it is possible.
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly to these systems could lead If the light continues to flash, when
diagnosing any malfunction. to costly repairs not covered it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
by the vehicle warranty. This Find a safe place to park the
Notice: If the vehicle is could also result in a failure vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
continually driven with this to pass a required Emission least 10 seconds, and restart the
light on, after a while, the Inspection/Maintenance engine. If the light is still flashing,
emission controls might not test. See Accessories and follow the previous steps and see
work as well, the vehicle fuel Modifications on page 103. your dealer for service as soon as
economy might not be as good, possible.
and the engine might not run This light comes on during a
as smoothly. This could lead to malfunction in one of two ways:
costly repairs that might not be Light Flashing: A misfire condition
covered by the vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.

Light On Steady: An emission

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and
control system malfunction has with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs
been detected on the vehicle. causes the engine not to run as
Diagnosis and service might be efficiently as designed and can Some state/provincial and
required. cause: stalling after start-up, local governments may have
stalling when the vehicle is programs to inspect the on-vehicle
The following may correct an changed into gear, misfiring, emission control equipment.
emissions system malfunction: hesitation on acceleration, For the inspection, the emission
. Make sure the fuel cap is fully or stumbling on acceleration. system test equipment is connected
installed. See Filling the Tank on These conditions might go away to the vehicles Data Link
page 939. The diagnostic once the engine is warmed up. Connector (DLC).
system can determine if the If one or more of these
fuel cap has been left off or conditions occurs, change the
improperly installed. A loose or fuel brand used. It will require
missing fuel cap allows fuel to at least one full tank of the
evaporate into the atmosphere. proper fuel to turn the light off.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the See Recommended Fuel on
light off. page 935.
The DLC is under the instrument
. Make sure the electrical system If none of the above have made panel to the left of the steering
is not wet. The system could the light turn off, your dealer can wheel. See your dealer if assistance
be wet if the vehicle was driven check the vehicle. The dealer is needed.
through a deep puddle of has the proper test equipment
water. The condition is usually and diagnostic tools to fix any
corrected when the electrical mechanical or electrical problems
system dries out. A few driving that might have developed.
trips should turn the light off.

The vehicle may not pass Brake System Warning When the ignition is on, the brake
inspection if: system warning light also comes
Light on when the parking brake is set.
. The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if The vehicle brake system The light stays on if the parking
the light does not come on when consists of two hydraulic circuits. brake does not fully release. If it
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN If one circuit is not working, the stays on after the parking brake is
while the engine is off. remaining circuit can still work to fully released, it means the vehicle
stop the vehicle. For normal braking has a brake problem.
. The critical emission control performance, both circuits need to
systems have not been If the light comes on while driving,
be working pull off the road and stop carefully.
completely diagnosed by
the system. This can happen If the warning light comes on, there The pedal might be harder to
if the battery has recently is a brake problem. Have the brake push, or the pedal can go closer
been replaced or if the battery system inspected right away. to the floor. It may take longer to
has run down. The diagnostic stop. If the light is still on, have
system evaluates critical the vehicle towed for service.
emission control systems during See Towing the Vehicle on
normal driving. This can take page 1079.
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the English Metric
inspection, your dealer can
This light should come on briefly
prepare the vehicle for
when the engine is started. If it does
inspection.
not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn if there is a
problem.

If it does not, have the vehicle Electronic Stability

{ WARNING serviced by your dealer. If the
Control (ESC) Indicator
system is working normally the
The brake system might not be indicator light then goes off. Light
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on. If the ABS light stays on, turn the
Driving with the brake system ignition off. If the light comes on
warning light on can lead to a while driving, stop as soon as it is
crash. If the light is still on after safely possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to
the vehicle has been pulled off
reset the system. If the ABS light
the road and carefully stopped,
stays on, or comes on again while
have the vehicle towed for driving, the vehicle needs service. This light comes on briefly while the
service. If the regular brake system warning engine is started. If it does not, have
light is not on, the vehicle still has the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the system is working normally the
Antilock Brake System indicator light will then go off.
If the regular brake system warning
(ABS) Warning Light light is also on, the vehicle does not This light can come on after
have antilock brakes and there is the vehicle is first driven and
a problem with the regular brakes. the STABILITRAK NOT READY
See Brake System Warning Light on message appears in the Driver
page 520. Information Center (DIC). See
See Brake System Messages on Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 531 for all brake related DIC page 931 for more information.
messages.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.

If the light stays on, or comes Traction Control System If it stays on or comes on while
on while driving a SERVICE driving a SERVICE TRACTION
STABILITRAK message appears
(TCS) Warning Light CONTROL message appears in
in the DIC. This indicates that the Driver Information Center (DIC).
there may be a problem with the This indicates that there could be
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) a problem with the traction control
system and the vehicle may need system and the vehicle may need
service. When this warning light is service. When this warning light is
on and the SERVICE STABILITRAK on and the SERVICE TRACTION
message appears on the DIC, the CONTROL message appears on
ESC system does not assist in For vehicles with a Traction Control the DIC, the system does not limit
controlling the vehicle. System (TCS) and StabiliTrak wheel spin.
When the system is active, the light warning light, this light comes on If the traction control system is
flashes while the system is assisting briefly when the engine is started. manually turned off, this light comes
in controlling the vehicle. If it does not, have the vehicle on and the TRACTION CONTROL
See Electronic Stability Control serviced by your dealer. If the OFF message appears on the DIC.
(ESC) on page 931 and Ride system is working normally the See Traction Control System (TCS)
Control System Messages on indicator light then goes off. on page 929 and Ride Control
page 535 for more information. When the system is active, the System Messages on page 535
light flashes while the system is for more information.
limiting wheel spin or assisting
with controlling the vehicle.

Engine Coolant Notice: Driving with the engine Tire Pressure Light
coolant temperature warning light
Temperature Warning on could cause the vehicle to
Light overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 1021. The vehicle's
engine could be damaged, and
it might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature
warning light on. For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
The engine coolant temperature comes on briefly when the engine
This light comes on briefly while warning light comes on when the is started. It provides information
starting the vehicle. engine has overheated. about tire pressures and the TPMS.
If it does not, have the vehicle If this happens pull over and turn
serviced by the dealer. If the system off the engine as soon as possible.
is working normally the indicator See Engine Overheating on
light goes off. page 1021 for more information.

When the Light is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light Notice: Lack of proper engine
This indicates that one or more oil maintenance can damage the
of the tires are significantly engine. The repairs would not be
underinflated. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
A tire pressure message can schedule for changing engine oil.
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 537 for more This light comes on briefly while
information. Stop as soon as starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
possible, and inflate the tires to
the pressure value shown on the
{ WARNING dealer. If the system is working
Tire and Loading Information label. normally, the indicator light then
Do not keep driving if the oil goes off.
See Tire Pressure on page 1049 pressure is low. The engine can
for more information. become so hot that it catches fire. If the light comes on and stays on, it
Someone could be burned. Check means that oil is not flowing through
When the Light Flashes First and the engine properly. The vehicle
Then is On Steady the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced. could be low on oil and it might
This indicates that there may be a have some other system problem.
problem with the TPMS. The light
flashes for about a minute and
stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 1052 for
more information.

Security Light Front Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light
For information regarding this light The fog lamp lights come on when The cruise control light comes on
and the vehicle's security system, the fog lamps are in use. whenever the cruise control is set.
see Anti-Theft Alarm System on The lights go out when the fog The light goes out when the cruise
page 211. lamps are turned off. See Fog control is turned off. See Cruise
Lamps on page 65 for more Control on page 932 for more
High-Beam On Light information. information.
This light comes on when the

high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 63 for more
information.

Information Displays position indicator. See Automatic DIC Operation and Displays
Transmission on page 925 for
The DIC has different displays
more information.
Driver Information which can be accessed by pressing
If your vehicle has these the DIC buttons located on the
Center (DIC) features, the DIC also displays instrument panel, to the right of
Your vehicle has a Driver the compass direction and the the instrument panel cluster.
Information Center (DIC). outside air temperature when
viewing the trip and fuel information. DIC Buttons
All messages will appear in
The compass direction appears
the DIC display located below
on the top right corner of the
the speedometer in the instrument
DIC display. The outside air
panel cluster. The DIC buttons are
temperature automatically appears
located on the instrument panel,
in the bottom right corner of the
to the right of the instrument panel
DIC display. If there is a problem
cluster.
with the system that controls the
The DIC comes on when the ignition temperature display, the numbers
is on. After a short delay, the DIC will be replaced with dashes. If this
will display the information that was occurs, have the vehicle serviced
last displayed before the engine by your dealer.
was turned off.
The DIC also allows some features
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and to be customized. See Vehicle
vehicle system information, and Personalization on page 539 The buttons are the trip/fuel,
warning messages if a system for more information. vehicle information, customization,
problem is detected. The bottom and set/reset buttons. The button
line of the DIC shows the shift lever functions are detailed in the
following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature
button to display the odometer, called the retro-active reset. This
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
can be used to set the trip odometer
trip odometers, fuel range, average to scroll through the following menu
economy, instantaneous economy, to the number of miles (kilometers)
items:
Active Fuel Management indicator driven since the ignition was last
on vehicles with this feature, and Odometer turned on. This can be used if the
average speed. trip odometer is not reset at the
Press the trip/fuel button until
beginning of the trip.
T (Vehicle Information): Press ODOMETER displays. This display
this button to display the oil life, shows the distance the vehicle has To use the retro-active reset feature,
units, tire pressure readings, been driven in either miles (mi) or press and hold the set/reset button
and compass zone and compass kilometers (km). for at least four seconds. The trip
calibration on vehicles with this odometer will display the number
Trip A and Trip B of miles (mi) or kilometers (km)
feature.
Press the trip/fuel button until driven since the ignition was last
U (Customization): Press TRIP A or TRIP B displays. turned on and the vehicle was
this button to customize the This display shows the current moving. Once the vehicle begins
feature settings on your vehicle. distance traveled in either miles (mi) moving, the trip odometer will
See Vehicle Personalization on or kilometers (km) since the last accumulate mileage. For example,
page 539 for more information. reset for each trip odometer. if the vehicle was driven 8 km
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to Both trip odometers can be (5 miles) before it is started again,
set or reset certain functions and to used at the same time. and then the retro-active reset
turn off or acknowledge messages feature is activated, the display
Each trip odometer can be reset
on the DIC. will show 8 km (5 miles). As the
to zero separately by pressing the
vehicle begins moving, the display
set/reset button while the desired
will then increase to 8.2 km
trip odometer is displayed.
(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is number may change even though Instantaneous Economy
activated after the vehicle is started, the same amount of fuel is in the Press the trip/fuel button until INST
but before it begins moving, the fuel tank. This is because different ECONOMY displays. This display
display will show the number of driving conditions produce different shows the current fuel economy at a
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that fuel economies. Generally, freeway particular moment and will change
were driven during the last ignition driving produces better fuel frequently as driving conditions
cycle. economy than city driving. change. This display shows the
Fuel Range If your vehicle is low on fuel, instantaneous fuel economy in
the FUEL LEVEL LOW message miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
Press the trip/fuel button until displays. See Fuel System 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike
FUEL RANGE displays. This Messages on page 534 for average economy, this screen
display shows the approximate more information. cannot be reset.
number of remaining miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) the vehicle can Average Economy Average Speed
be driven without refueling. Press the trip/fuel button until Press the trip/fuel button until
The fuel range estimate is based AVG ECONOMY displays. This AVERAGE SPEED displays.
on an average of the vehicle's fuel display shows the approximate This display shows the average
economy over recent driving history average miles per gallon (mpg) or speed of the vehicle in miles
and the amount of fuel remaining liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). per hour (mph) or kilometers
in the fuel tank. This estimate will This number is calculated based per hour (km/h). This average is
change if driving conditions change. on the number of mpg (L/100 km) calculated based on the various
For example, if driving in traffic and recorded since the last time this vehicle speeds recorded since the
making frequent stops, this display menu item was reset. To reset this last reset of this value. To reset the
may read one number, but if the display to zero, press and hold the value, press and hold the set/reset
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the set/reset button. button. The display will return
to zero.

Blank Display When the remaining oil life is Units

This display shows no information. low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Press the vehicle information
SOON message will appear button until UNITS displays.
Vehicle Information Menu on the display. See Engine This display allows you to select
Items Oil Messages on page 533. between English or Metric units of
You should change the oil as
T (Vehicle Information): Press soon as possible. See Engine
measurement. Once in this display,
this button to scroll through the press the set/reset button to select
Oil on page 107. In addition between ENGLISH or METRIC
following menu items: to the engine oil life system units.
Oil Life monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended Tire Pressure
Press the vehicle information in the Maintenance Schedule
button until OIL LIFE REMAINING On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
in this manual. See Scheduled Monitor System (TPMS), the
displays. This display shows an Maintenance on page 112 for
estimate of the oil's remaining pressure for each tire can be viewed
more information. in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that Remember, you must reset the shown in either pounds per square
means 99% of the current oil life OIL LIFE yourself after each oil inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
remains. The engine oil life system change. It will not reset itself. Also, the vehicle information button until
will alert you to change the oil on be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE the DIC displays FRONT TIRES
a schedule consistent with your accidentally at any time other than PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press
driving conditions. when the oil has just been changed. the vehicle information button again
It cannot be reset accurately until until the DIC displays REAR TIRES
the next oil change. To reset the PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
engine oil life system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 1011.

If a low tire pressure condition Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and

is detected by the system while
driving, a message advising you to Messages are displayed on the DIC Charging Messages
add air to a specific tire will appear to notify the driver that the status of BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
in the display. See Tire Pressure on the vehicle has changed and that
page 1049 and Tire Messages on some action may be needed by This message displays when
page 537 for more information. the driver to correct the condition. the system detects that the
Multiple messages may appear one battery voltage is dropping beyond
If the tire pressure display shows a reasonable level. The battery
after another. Some messages may
dashes instead of a value, there saver system starts reducing
not require immediate action, but
may be a problem with your vehicle. certain features of the vehicle that
you can press the set/reset button
If this consistently occurs, see your you may be able to notice. At the
to acknowledge that you received
dealer for service. point that the features are disabled,
the message and clear it from the
Change Compass Zone DIC display. Pressing any of the this message is displayed. It means
DIC buttons also acknowledges that the vehicle is trying to save the
Your vehicle may have this feature. charge in the battery.
and clears any messages. Some
To change the compass zone
messages cannot be cleared from Turn off all unnecessary
through the DIC, see Compass on
the DIC display because they are accessories to allow the battery
page 55.
more urgent. These messages to recharge.
Calibrate Compass require action before they can
be cleared. You should take any The normal battery voltage range is
Your vehicle may have this feature. 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
messages that appear on the
The compass can be manually
display seriously and remember
calibrated. To calibrate the compass
that clearing the messages will only
through the DIC, see Compass on
make the messages disappear, not
page 55.
correct the problem. The following
Blank Display are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information
This display shows no information.
about them.

SERVICE BATTERY Door Ajar Messages PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

CHARGING SYSTEM This message displays when the
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when there front passenger door is not closed
is a problem with the generator and This message displays when the properly. Make sure that the door
battery charging systems. Driving driver door is not closed properly. is closed completely.
with this problem could drain the Make sure that the door is closed
battery. Turn off all unnecessary completely. RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
accessories. Stop and turn off the HOOD OPEN This message displays when the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to passenger side rear door is not
do so. Have the electrical system If your vehicle has the remote start closed properly. Make sure that
checked by your dealer immediately. feature, this message displays when the door is closed completely.
the hood is not closed properly.
Brake System Messages Make sure that the hood is closed TRUNK OPEN
completely. See Hood on page 105. This message displays when the
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM trunk is not closed completely.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when Make sure that the trunk is closed
service is required on the brake This message displays when the completely. See Trunk on
system. Have the brake system driver side rear door is not closed page 210.
serviced by your dealer as soon as properly. Make sure that the door
possible. The brake system warning is closed completely.
light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Brake
System Warning Light on
page 520.

Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP

Messages ENGINE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your Notice: If you drive the vehicle
ENGINE HOT A/C vehicle while the engine is while the engine is overheating,
(Air Conditioning) OFF overheating, severe engine severe engine damage may
This message displays when damage may occur. If an occur. If an overheat warning
the engine coolant becomes overheat warning appears appears on the instrument panel
hotter than the normal operating on the instrument panel cluster cluster and/or DIC, stop the
temperature. To avoid added strain and/or DIC, stop the vehicle vehicle as soon as possible.
on a hot engine, the air conditioning as soon as possible. Do not See Engine Overheating on
compressor is automatically turned increase the engine speed page 1021 for more information.
off. When the coolant temperature above normal idling speed. This message displays along with a
returns to normal, the A/C operation See Engine Overheating on continuous chime when the engine
automatically resumes. You can page 1021 for more information. has overheated. Stop and turn the
continue to drive your vehicle. This message displays when the engine off immediately to avoid
If this message continues to appear, engine coolant temperature is too severe engine damage. See Engine
have the system repaired by your hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to Overheating on page 1021.
dealer as soon as possible to idle until it cools down.
avoid compressor damage.

SERVICE A/C menu. See Oil Life under Driver Stop the vehicle immediately,
(Air Conditioning) SYSTEM Information Center (DIC) on as engine damage can result
page 526 and Engine Oil Life from driving a vehicle with low oil
This message displays when System on page 1011. pressure. Have the vehicle serviced
the electronic sensors that control by your dealer as soon as possible
the air conditioning and heating OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP when this message is displayed.
systems are no longer working. ENGINE
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you Notice: If you drive the vehicle Engine Power Messages
notice a drop in heating and air while the engine oil pressure
is low, severe engine damage ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
conditioning efficiency.
may occur. If a low oil pressure This message displays when the
warning appears on the Driver vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Engine Oil Messages Information Center (DIC), stop Reduced engine power can affect
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON the vehicle as soon as possible. the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
Do not drive the vehicle until the If this message is on, but there
This message displays when cause of the low oil pressure is is no reduction in performance,
service is required for the vehicle. corrected. See Engine Oil on proceed to your destination.
See your dealer. See Engine page 107 for more information. The performance may be reduced
Oil on page 107 and Scheduled the next time the vehicle is driven.
Maintenance on page 112 for This message displays when the
vehicle's engine oil pressure is low. The vehicle may be driven at a
more information. reduced speed while this message
The oil pressure light also appears
Acknowledging the CHANGE on the instrument panel cluster. is on, but acceleration and speed
ENGINE OIL SOON message will See Engine Oil Pressure Light on may be reduced. Anytime this
not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING. page 524. message stays on, the vehicle
That must be done at the OIL LIFE should be taken to your dealer
screen under the vehicle information for service as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages AUTOMATIC LIGHT

CONTROL ON
FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY This message displays when the
This message displays when your automatic headlamps are turned
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel This message displays when the on. See Exterior Lamp Controls on
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel battery in the Remote Keyless page 61 for more information.
Gauge on page 512 and Filling Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to
the Tank on page 939 for more be replaced. To replace the battery, TURN SIGNAL ON
information. see Battery Replacement under This message displays as a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) reminder to turn off the turn signal
TIGHTEN GAS CAP System Operation on page 23. if you drive your vehicle for more
This message may be displayed than about 1.2 km (0.75 mile) with
if the gas cap is not on, or is not Lamp Messages a turn signal on. See Turn and
fully tightened. Check the gas Lane-Change Signals on page 64.
cap to ensure that it is on properly. AUTOMATIC LIGHT
See Filling the Tank on page 939 CONTROL OFF This message displays and a chime
for more information. sounds only when the ignition is in
This message displays when the ON/RUN. The message will not
automatic headlamps are turned disappear until the turn signal is
off. See Exterior Lamp Controls on manually turned off, or a turn is
page 61 for more information. completed.

Ride Control System SERVICE TRACTION TRACTION CONTROL OFF

Messages CONTROL If your vehicle has the Traction
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS), this
SERVICE STABILITRAK Control System (TCS), this message message displays when the TCS
If your vehicle has Electronic displays when the system is not turns off. See Traction Control
Stability Control (ESC), this functioning properly. A warning System (TCS) on page 929 for
message displays if there has light also appears on the instrument more information.
been a problem detected with ESC. panel cluster. See Traction Control This message may display when
The ESC/TCS light also appears System (TCS) Warning Light on the ignition is in ON/RUN and
on the instrument panel cluster. page 522. See Traction Control disappears after 10 seconds,
See Electronic Stability Control System (TCS) on page 929 for unless it is acknowledged or
(ESC) on page 931 for more more information. Have the TCS an urgent warning appears.
information. serviced by your dealer as soon
as possible. Any of the following conditions may
If this message turns on while you cause the TCS to turn off:
are driving, pull off the road as STABILITRAK NOT READY
soon as possible and stop carefully.
. The TCS is turned off by
Try resetting the system by turning If your vehicle has Electronic pressing the traction control
the ignition off and then back on. Stability Control (ESC), this button. See Traction Control
If this message still stays on or message may display and the System (TCS) on page 929
turns back on again while you are ESC/TCS light on the instrument for more information.
driving, your vehicle needs service. panel cluster may be on after first . The battery is low.
Have the system inspected by your driving the vehicle and exceeding
30 km/h (19 mph) for 30 seconds. . There is a TCS failure.
dealer as soon as possible.
The ESC system is not functional See your dealer for service.
until the light has turned off. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on

TRACTION CONTROL ON Anti-Theft Alarm System Service Vehicle Messages

If your vehicle has the Traction Messages ERROR
Control System (TCS), this message
displays when the TCS is turned on. SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM This message displays while
See Traction Control System (TCS) This message displays when there viewing the odometer or trip
on page 929 for more information. is a problem with the theft-deterrent odometers if there is a problem
system programmed in the key. with the instrument panel cluster.
Airbag System Messages A fault has been detected in the See your dealer for service.
system which means that the SERVICE POWER STEERING
SERVICE AIR BAG system is disabled and it is not
This message displays when there protecting the vehicle. The vehicle This message displays when
is a problem with the airbag system. usually restarts; however, you may a problem is detected with the
Have your vehicle serviced by your want to take the vehicle to your power steering system. When this
dealer immediately. See Airbag dealer before turning off the engine. message is displayed, you may
Readiness Light on page 515 See Immobilizer Operation on notice that the effort required to
for more information. page 212 for more information. steer the vehicle increases or feels
heavier, but you will still be able to
THEFT ATTEMPTED steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
This message displays if the serviced by your dealer immediately.
content theft-deterrent system has
detected a break-in attempt while
you were away from your vehicle.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON Tire Messages TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
non-emissions related malfunction Monitor System (TPMS), this
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
SYSTEM message displays when the TPMS
by your dealer as soon as possible. On vehicles with the Tire Pressure is re-learning the tire positions on
Monitor System (TPMS), this your vehicle. The tire positions must
STARTING DISABLED message displays if a part on be re-learned after rotating the tires
SERVICE THROTTLE the TPMS is not working properly. or after replacing a tire or sensor.
This message displays if the starting The tire pressure light also flashes See Tire Inspection on page 1056,
of the engine is disabled due to the and then remains on during the Tire Rotation on page 1056,
electronic throttle control system. same ignition cycle. See Tire Tire Pressure Monitor System on
Have your vehicle serviced by your Pressure Light on page 523. page 1051, and Tire Pressure on
dealer immediately. Several conditions may cause page 1049 for more information.
this message to appear. See Tire
This message only appears while Pressure Monitor Operation on
the ignition is in ON/RUN, and will page 1052 for more information.
not disappear until the problem is If the warning comes on and stays
resolved. on, there may be a problem with
This message cannot be the TPMS. See your dealer.
acknowledged.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE label. See Tires on page 1042, Vehicle Reminder
Vehicle Load Limits on page 912,
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
and Tire Pressure on page 1049.
Messages
Monitor System (TPMS), this
The DIC also shows the tire ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
message displays when the
pressure values. See Driver WITH CARE
pressure in one or more of the
Information Center (DIC) on
vehicle's tires is low. This message This message displays when
page 526.
also displays LEFT FRT (left front), the outside air temperature is
RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR cold enough to create icy road
(left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear) Transmission Messages
conditions. Adjust your driving
to indicate the location of the low SERVICE TRANSMISSION accordingly.
tire. The low tire pressure warning
light will also come on. See Tire This message displays when there
Pressure Light on page 523. is a problem with the transmission. Washer Fluid Messages
You can receive more than one See your dealer for service. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
tire pressure message at a time. TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE FLUID
To read the other messages that
may have been sent at the same
ENGINE This message displays when the
time, press the set/reset button. This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low.
If a tire pressure message appears transmission fluid in your vehicle is Fill the windshield washer reservoir
on the DIC, stop as soon as you too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow as soon as possible. See Engine
can. Have the tire pressures it to idle until it cools down. If the Compartment Overview on
checked and set to those shown warning message continues to page 106 for the location of the
on the Tire and Loading Information display, have the vehicle serviced windshield washer reservoir. Also,
by your dealer as soon as possible. see Washer Fluid on page 1025
for more information.

Vehicle To change customization Feature Settings Menu Items

preferences, use the following
Personalization The following are customization
procedure.
features that allow you to program
Your vehicle has customization Entering the Feature settings to the vehicle:
capabilities that allow you to Settings Menu
program certain features to one DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
preferred setting. Customization 1. Turn the ignition on and place This feature will only display if a
features can only be programmed the vehicle in P (Park). language other than English has
to one setting on the vehicle and To avoid excessive drain on the been set. This feature allows you to
cannot be programmed to a battery, it is recommended that change the language in which the
preferred setting for two different the headlamps are turned off. DIC messages appear to English.
drivers.
2. Press the customization Press the customization button until
All of the customization options may button to enter the feature the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
not be available on your vehicle. settings menu. ENGLISH screen appears on the
Only the options available will be DIC display. Press the set/reset
displayed on the DIC. If the menu is not available,
FEATURE SETTINGS button once to display all DIC
The default settings for the AVAILABLE IN PARK will messages in English.
customization features were set display. Before entering the
when your vehicle left the factory, menu, make sure the vehicle
but may have been changed from is in P (Park).
their default state since then.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE AUTO DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
This feature allows you to select This feature allows you to driver door will unlock when the key
the language in which the DIC select whether or not to turn is taken out of the ignition.
messages will appear. off the automatic door unlocking DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver
Press the customization button until feature. It also allows you to door will unlock when the vehicle is
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen select which doors and when shifted into P (Park).
appears on the DIC display. Press the doors will automatically unlock. ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
the set/reset button once to access See Programmable Automatic will unlock when the key is taken
the settings for this feature. Then Door Unlock under Automatic out of the ignition.
press the customization button to Door Locks on page 28 for
more information. ALL IN PARK (default): All of the
scroll through the following settings: doors will unlock when the vehicle is
ENGLISH (default): All messages Press the customization button until shifted into P (Park).
will appear in English. AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset NO CHANGE: No change will be
FRANCAIS: All messages will button once to access the settings made to this feature. The current
appear in French. for this feature. Then press the setting will remain.
ESPANOL: All messages will customization button to scroll To select a setting, press the
appear in Spanish. through the following settings: set/reset button while the desired
NO CHANGE: No change will be OFF: None of the doors will setting is displayed on the DIC.
made to this feature. The current automatically unlock.
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
setting is displayed on the DIC.

REMOTE DOOR LOCK LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the will flash when you press the lock This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive button on the RKE transmitter. type of feedback you will receive
when locking the vehicle with the HORN ONLY: The horn will sound when unlocking the vehicle with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) on the second press of the lock the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive button on the RKE transmitter. transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when locking the vehicle HORN & LIGHTS ON (default): feedback when unlocking the
with the RKE transmitter if any of The exterior lamps will flash when vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
the doors are open. See Remote you press the lock button on the the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System RKE transmitter, and the horn will Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 23 for more sound when the lock button is Operation on page 23 for more
information. pressed again within five seconds information.
Press the customization button until of the previous command. Press the customization button
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on NO CHANGE: No change will be until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
the DIC display. Press the set/reset made to this feature. The current appears on the DIC display. Press
button once to access the settings setting will remain. the set/reset button once to access
for this feature. Then press the the settings for this feature. Then
customization button to scroll To select a setting, press the press the customization button to
through the following settings: set/reset button while the desired scroll through the following settings:
HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
be no feedback when you press the will not flash when you press
lock button on the RKE transmitter. the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior Press the customization button APPROACH LIGHTING
lamps will flash when you press until EXIT LIGHTING appears on This feature allows you to select
the unlock button on the RKE the DIC display. Press the set/reset whether or not to have the exterior
transmitter. button once to access the settings lights turn on briefly during low
NO CHANGE: No change will be for this feature. Then press the light periods after unlocking the
made to this feature. The current customization button to scroll vehicle using the Remote Keyless
setting will remain. through the following settings: Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To select a setting, press the OFF: The exterior lamps will not Press the customization button until
set/reset button while the desired turn on. APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
setting is displayed on the DIC. 30 SECONDS (default): The the DIC display. Press the set/reset
exterior lamps will stay on for button once to access the settings
EXIT LIGHTING 30 seconds. for this feature. Then press the
This feature allows you to select 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will customization button to scroll
the amount of time you want stay on for one minute. through the following settings:
the exterior lamps to remain on OFF: The exterior lights will not
when it is dark enough outside. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
stay on for two minutes. turn on when you unlock the vehicle
This happens after the key is with the RKE transmitter.
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current ON (default): If it is dark enough
setting will remain. outside, the exterior lights will turn
on briefly when you unlock the
To select a setting, press the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for LOUD: The chime volume will be Press the customization button until
20 seconds or until the lock button set to a loud level. REMOTE START appears on the
on the RKE transmitter is pressed, NO CHANGE: No change will be DIC display. Press the set/reset
or the vehicle is no longer off. made to this feature. The current button once to access the settings
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) setting will remain. for this feature. Then press the
System Operation on page 23 customization button to scroll
for more information. There is no default for chime through the following settings:
volume. The volume will stay
NO CHANGE : No change will be at the last known setting. OFF: The remote start feature will
made to this feature. The current be disabled.
setting will remain. To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired ON (default): The remote start
To select a setting, press the setting is displayed on the DIC. feature will be enabled.
set/reset button while the desired NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. REMOTE START made to this feature. The current
CHIME VOLUME If your vehicle has this feature, it setting will remain.
allows you to turn the remote start To select a setting, press the
This feature allows you to select the off or on. The remote start feature
volume level of the chime. set/reset button while the desired
allows you to start the engine from setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until outside of the vehicle using the
CHIME VOLUME appears on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
DIC display. Press the set/reset transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
button once to access the settings Start on page 25 for more
for this feature. Then press the information.
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level.

FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS Exiting the Feature

This feature allows you to set all of This feature allows you to exit the Settings Menu
the customization features back to FEATURE SETTINGS menu. The feature settings menu will be
their factory default settings. Press the customization button exited when any of the following
Press the customization button until until FEATURE SETTINGS occurs:
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the . The vehicle is shifted out of
the DIC display. Press the set/reset DIC display. Press the set/reset P (Park).
button once to access the settings button once to exit the menu.
for this feature. Then press the
. The vehicle is no longer in
customization button to scroll If you do not exit, pressing the ON/RUN.
through the following settings: customization button again will . The trip/fuel or vehicle
return you to the beginning of information DIC buttons
RESTORE ALL (default): The the FEATURE SETTINGS menu.
customization features will be set are pressed.
to their factory default settings. . The end of the feature settings
DO NOT RESTORE: The menu is reached and exited.
customization features will not be . A 40-second time period has
set to their factory default settings. elapsed with no selection made.
To select a setting, press the

Universal Remote This system provides a way

to replace up to three remote
Be sure to keep the original
remote control transmitter for
System control transmitters used to use in other vehicles, as well as
activate devices such as garage for future programming. Only the
See Radio Frequency
door openers, security systems, original remote control transmitter
Statement on page 1317 for
and home automation devices. is needed for Fixed Code
information regarding Part 15
Do not use this system with any programming. The programmed
of the Federal Communications
garage door opener that does not buttons should be erased when the
Commission (FCC) rules and
have the stop and reverse feature. vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
Industry Canada Standards
This includes any garage door See Erasing Universal Home
RSS-210/220/310.
opener model manufactured Remote Buttons in this section.
Universal Remote System before April 1, 1982. Park the vehicle outside of the
garage when programming a garage
Programming Read the instructions completely
door. Be sure that people and
before attempting to program the
transmitter. Because of the steps objects are clear of the garage door
involved, it may be helpful to have or gate that is being programmed.
another person available to assist
in programming the transmitter.
This vehicle may have the Universal

Home Remote System.

Programming Universal Home

Remote Rolling Code
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after
1996 are Rolling Code units.
Programming a garage door opener 2. In the garage, locate the
involves time-sensitive actions, so garage door opener receiver
read the entire procedure before (motor-head unit). Locate
starting. Otherwise, the device will To program up to three devices: the Learn or Smart button.
time out and the procedure will have It can usually be found where
1. From inside the vehicle, the hanging antenna wire is
to be repeated.
press the two outside buttons attached to the motor-head
at the same time for one to unit and may be a colored
two seconds, and immediately button. Press this button.
release them. After pressing this button,
complete the following steps
in less than 30 seconds.

3. Immediately return to the To program another Rolling Code Programming Universal Home
vehicle. Press and hold the device such as an additional garage Remote Fixed Code
Universal Home Remote button door opener, a security device,
that will be used to control the or home automation device, repeat For questions or help programming
garage door until the garage Steps 1 through 5, choosing a the Universal Home Remote
door moves. The indicator different function button in Step 3 System, call 1-866-572-2728
light, above the selected button, than what was used for the garage or go to www.learcar2u.com.
should slowly blink. This button door opener. Most garage door openers sold
may need to be held for up to If these instructions do not work, before 1996 are Fixed Code units.
20 seconds. the garage door opener is probably Programming a garage door opener
4. Immediately, within one second, a Fixed Code unit. Follow the involves time-sensitive actions, so
release the button when Programming instructions that read the entire procedure before
the garage door moves. follow for a Fixed Code garage starting. Otherwise, the device will
The indicator light will blink door opener. time out and the procedure will have
rapidly until programming is to be repeated.
complete.
5. Press and release the same
button again. The garage door
should move, confirming that
programming is successful
and complete.

return to the previous section

for Programming Universal
Home Remote Rolling Code.
Your hand-held transmitter
can have between 8 to 12 dip
switches depending on the
brand of transmitter. Example of Eight Dip Switches
The garage door opener receiver with Two Positions
(motor head unit) could also
have a row of dip switches
that can be used when
programming the Universal
To program up to three devices: Home Remote. If the total
1. To verify that the garage door number of switches on the
opener is a Fixed Code unit, motor head and hand-held Example of Eight Dip Switches
remove the battery cover on transmitter is different, or if the with Three Positions
the hand held transmitter dip switch settings are different,
supplied by the manufacturer use the dip switch settings on The panel of switches might not
of the garage door opener the motor head unit to program appear exactly as they do in
motor. If there are a row of dip the Universal Home Remote. the examples above, but they
switches similar to the graphic The motor head dip switch should be similar.
above, the garage door opener settings can also be used
is a Fixed Code unit. If you do when the original hand held
not see a row of dip switches, transmitter is not available.

The switch positions on the

. If a switch is set between
hand-held transmitter could be the up and down position,
labeled, as follows: write Middle.
. A switch in the up position The switch settings written
could be labeled as Up, down in Step 2 will now
+, or On. become the button strokes
to be entered into the
. A switch in the down Universal Home Remote in
position could be labeled Step 4. Be sure to enter the
as Down, , or Off. switch settings written down
. A switch in the middle in Step 2, in order from left
position could be labeled as to right, into the Universal
Middle, 0, or Neutral. Home Remote, when A. Left Button
completing Step 4. ("Up," "+," or "On.")
2. Write down the 8 to 12 switch
settings from left to right as 3. From inside your vehicle, first B. Middle Button
follows: firmly press all three buttons ("Middle," "0," or "Neutral.")
. at the same time for about
When a switch is in the up C. Right Button
three seconds. Release
position, write Left. ("Down," "-," or "Off.")
the buttons to put the
. When a switch is in the Universal Home Remote
down position, write Right. into programming mode.

4. The indicator lights will blink 5. After entering all of the switch 8. Press and release the same
slowly. Enter each switch positions, again, firmly press and button again. The garage door
setting from Step 2 into your release all three buttons at the should move, confirming that
vehicle's Universal Home same time. The indicator lights programming is successful and
Remote. You will have two and will turn on. complete.
one-half minutes to complete 6. Press and hold the button To program another Fixed Code
Step 4. Now press one button on that will be used to control device such as an additional garage
the Universal Home Remote for the garage door until the garage door opener, a security device,
each switch setting as follows: door moves. The indicator or home automation device, repeat
. If you wrote Left, press light above the selected button Steps 1 through 8, choosing a
the left button in the should slowly blink. This button different button in Step 6 than what
vehicle. may need to be held for up to was used for the garage door
. If you wrote Right, press 55 seconds. opener.
the right button in the 7. Immediately release the button
vehicle. when the garage door moves.
. If you wrote Middle, press The indicator light will blink
the middle button in the rapidly until programming is
vehicle. complete.

Universal Remote System Erasing Universal Home

Operation Remote Buttons
Press and hold the appropriate The programmed buttons should be
button for at least half of a second. erased when the vehicle is sold or
The indicator light will come on the lease ends.
while the signal is being transmitted. To erase either Rolling Code or
Fixed Code on the Universal Home
Reprogramming Universal Remote device:
Home Remote Buttons
1. Press and hold the 2 outside
Any of the three buttons can be buttons at the same time for
reprogrammed by repeating the approximately 20 seconds,
instructions. until the indicator lights, located
directly above the buttons, begin
to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin
to blink, release both buttons.
The codes from all buttons will
be erased.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices on page 133.

2 NOTES

Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Lighting Features
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Daytime Running Lamps Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-7
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Turn and Lane-Change Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
The exterior lamps control is located

on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.

6-2 Lighting
It controls the following systems: AUTO (Automatic): Automatically 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
. Headlamps turns on the headlamps at normal headlamps together with the
brightness, together with the following lamps listed below.
. Taillamps following: When the headlamps are turned
. Parking Lamps . Parking Lamps on while the vehicle is on, the
. headlamps will turn off automatically
License Plate Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights 10 minutes after the ignition is
. Instrument Panel Lights . Taillamps turned off. When the headlamps
. Fog Lamps (If Equipped) are turned on while the vehicle is
. License Plate Lamps
off, the headlamps will stay on for
The exterior lamps control has ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on 10 minutes before automatically
four positions: the parking lamps together with the turning off to prevent the battery
O (Off): Turns off the automatic following: from being drained. Turn the
headlamps and daytime running . Instrument Panel Lights headlamp control to off and then
lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp back to the headlamp on position
control to the off position again
. Taillamps to make the headlamps stay on
will turn the automatic headlamps . License Plate Lamps for an additional 10 minutes.
or DRL back on. For vehicles first . Parking Lamps
sold in Canada, the off position only
works when the vehicle is shifted
. Taillamps
into the P (Park) position. . License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped):
Turns on the fog lamps.
See Fog Lamps on page 65.

Lighting 6-3
Headlamp High/ Daytime Running When the DRL are on, the regular
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,
Low-Beam Changer Lamps (DRL)/Automatic and other lamps are not on.
To change the headlamps from low Headlamp System The instrument panel and cluster
beam to high beam, push the turn Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can are also not on.
signal/multifunction lever away make it easier for others to see the The headlamps automatically
from you. front of your vehicle during the day. change from DRL to the regular
This instrument panel cluster Fully functional daytime running headlamps depending on the
light 3 comes on if the highbeam lamps are required on all vehicles darkness of the surroundings.
lamps are turned on while the first sold in Canada. The other lamps that come on
ignition is in ON/RUN. The DRL system makes the with the headlamps will also
low-beam headlamps come on come on.
To change the headlamps from high
beam to low beam, pull the turn at a reduced brightness when When it is bright enough outside,
signal lever toward you. the following conditions are met: the headlamps go off and the DRL
. The ignition is in the ON/RUN come on.
Flash-to-Pass position. The regular headlamp system
. The exterior lamps control is should be turned on when needed.
This feature is used to signal to
the vehicle ahead that you want in AUTO. Do not cover the light sensor on top
to pass. . The engine is running. of the instrument panel because it
works with the DRL.
If the headlamps are off or in
the lowbeam position, pull the
turn signal lever toward you to
momentarily switch to high beams.
Release the lever to turn the
high-beam headlamps off.

6-4 Lighting
Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
The hazard warning flashers let Signals change. Hold it there until the lane
you warn others that you have a change is completed. If the lever is
problem. briefly pressed and released, the
The hazard warning flasher button turn signal flashes three times.
is located on top of the steering The lever returns to its starting
column. position whenever it is released.
| : Press to make the front and If after signaling a turn or lane
rear turn signal lamps flash on and change the arrow flashes rapidly
off. Press the button again to turn or does not come on, a signal bulb
the flashers off. might be burned out.
When the hazard warning flashers Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
are on, the turn signals will is not burned out, check the fuse.
not work. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
An arrow on the instrument panel page 1038.
cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. Turn Signal On Chime
Move the lever all the way up or If either one of the turn signals are
down to signal a turn. left on and the vehicle has been
driven more than 1.2 km (0.75 mile),
a chime will sound.

Lighting 6-5
Fog Lamps Interior Lighting Courtesy Lamps

# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles When a door is opened, the
with fog lamps, the button is located Instrument Panel courtesy lamps automatically
on the exterior lamps control. Illumination Control come on. They make it easy
The exterior lamps control is located for you to enter and leave your
on the instrument panel to the left D (Instrument Panel vehicle. You can also manually
of the steering column. Brightness): The knob with this turn these lamps on by fully turning
symbol on it is located next to the the instrument panel brightness
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN exterior lamps control to the left of
position for the fog lamps to control clockwise.
the steering wheel. Push the knob
come on. in all the way until it extends out The reading lamps, located on the
and then turn the knob clockwise rearview mirror, can be turned on
Press # to turn the fog lamps on or off independent of the automatic
or off. A light will come on in the or counterclockwise to brighten or
dim the lights. Push the knob back courtesy lamps, when the doors are
instrument panel cluster. closed.
in when finished.
When the headlamps are changed
to high beam, the fog lamps also
go off.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.

6-6 Lighting
Dome Lamps Lighting Features Entry lighting includes a feature

called theater dimming. With theater
The center mounted dome lamp dimming, the lamps do not turn
overhead comes on when a door Entry Lighting off at the end of the delay time.
is opened. This lamp can also be For vehicles with courtesy lamps, Instead, they slowly dim and then
turned on by turning the instrument they come on and stay on for a set go out. The delay time is canceled
panel brightness control clockwise. time whenever the unlock symbol if the ignition key is turned to
is pressed on the Remote Keyless ON/RUN or the power door lock
Reading Lamps Entry (RKE) transmitter. switch is pressed. The lamps will
The vehicle has reading lamps that dim right away.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay
also act as the dome lamp. Press on while it is open and then turn off When the ignition is on, illuminated
the button near each lamp to turn automatically about 20 seconds entry is inactive, which means the
them on and off. after the door is closed. If the unlock courtesy lamps will not come on
symbol is pressed and no door is unless a door is opened.
Map Lamps
opened, the lamps turn off after
The vehicle has map lamps on the about 20 seconds.
rearview mirror. Press the button
near each lamp on the mirror to
turn the map lamps on and off.

Lighting 6-7
Delayed Entry Lighting Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming

Delayed entry lighting illuminates This feature illuminates the interior Parade mode automatically prohibits
the interior for a period of time after for a period of time after the key is the dimming of the instrument panel
all the doors have been closed. removed from the ignition. displays during the daylight while
The ignition must be off for delayed The ignition must be off for delayed the headlamps are on so that the
entry lighting to work. Immediately exit lighting to work. When the key displays are still able to be seen.
after all the doors have been closed, is removed, interior illumination
the delayed entry lighting feature activates and remains on until Battery Load
continues to work until one of the one of the following occurs: Management
following occurs: . The ignition is in ON/RUN. The vehicle has Electric Power
. The ignition is in ON/RUN. . The power door locks are Management (EPM) that estimates
. The doors are locked. activated. the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
. An illumination period of about . An illumination period of for best performance and extended
25 seconds has elapsed. 20 seconds has elapsed. life of the battery.
If during the illumination period If during the illumination period When the battery's state of
a door is opened, the timed a door is opened, the timed charge is low, the voltage is raised
illumination period is canceled illumination period will be canceled slightly to quickly bring the charge
and the interior lamps remain on. and the interior lamps will remain back up. When the state of charge
on because a door is open. is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging.

6-8 Lighting
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge EPM works to prevent excessive Battery Power Protection
or a voltage display on the Driver discharge of the battery. It does this
Information Center (DIC), you may by balancing the generator's output This feature helps prevent the
see the voltage move up or down. and the vehicle's electrical needs. battery from being drained, if the
This is normal. If there is a problem, It can increase engine idle speed interior courtesy lamps, reading/
an alert will be displayed. to generate more power, whenever map lamps, visor vanity lamps,
needed. It can temporarily reduce or trunk lamp are accidentally left
The battery can be discharged at on. If any of these lamps are left
idle if the electrical loads are very the power demands of some
accessories. on, they automatically turn off after
high. This is true for all vehicles. 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.
This is because the generator Normally, these actions occur The lamps will not come back on
(alternator) may not be spinning in steps or levels, without being again until one of the following
fast enough at idle to produce noticeable. In rare cases at the occurs:
all the power that is needed for highest levels of corrective action,
very high electrical loads. this action may be noticeable to
. The ignition is turned on.
A high electrical load occurs when the driver. If so, a Driver Information . The exterior lamps control is
several of the following are on, Center (DIC) message might be turned off, then on again.
such as: headlamps, high beams, displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE. If this messages The headlamps will time out after
fog lamps, rear window defogger, 10 minutes, if they are manually
climate control fan at high speed, displays, it is recommended that
the driver reduce the electrical loads turned on with the ignition on or off.
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged as much as possible. See Driver
into accessory power outlets. Information Center (DIC) on
page 526.

Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Introduction To minimize taking your eyes off the

road while driving, do the following
System Infotainment
while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
Determine which radio the vehicle operation and controls of the
Introduction has and read the following pages to audio system.
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 become familiar with its features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 { WARNING radio stations.
Radio Taking your eyes off the road For more information, see Defensive
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 for extended periods could Driving on page 92.
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 cause a crash resulting in
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Notice: Contact your dealer
injury or death to you or others. before adding any equipment.
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-15 Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving. Adding audio or communication
Audio Players equipment could interfere with
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 the operation of the engine,
This system provides access to radio, or other systems, and
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
many audio and non-audio listings. could damage them. Follow
Phone federal rules covering mobile
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 radio and telephone equipment.

7-2 Infotainment System
The vehicle has Retained Operation

Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned
off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 921 for
more information.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it
is stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
Radio with CD (Base)

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
(Information): Press to switch the
display between the radio station
frequency and the time. While the
ignition is off, press this button to
display the time.
Speed Compensated Volume
(SCV): Radios with the Speed
Compensated Volume (SCV)
feature automatically adjust the
radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle
speeds up or slows down, so that
Radio with CD (MP3) the volume level is consistent.
The vehicle has one of these radios Softkeys

as its infotainment system. The Radio with CD (MP3) has six
softkeys located below the radio
display. Softkeys are used to control
functions that appear on the radio
display as tabs directly above the
softkeys.

To activate SCV: Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) Setting the Tone

1. Set the radio volume to the Radio with CD (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
desired level. To adjust the bass or treble: Radio with CD (MP3)
2. Press MENU to display the radio BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
1. Press the f knob until Bass or or Treble): To adjust the bass,
setup menu.
Treble displays. midrange, or treble:
3. Press the softkey under the
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
AUTO VOLUM tab on the radio
the following: 1. Press the f knob until the tone
display. control tabs display.
4. Press the softkey under the
. Turn the f knob. 2. Highlight the desired tone
desired Speed Compensated control tab by doing one of
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
. Press SEEK or SEEK.
the following:
or High) to select the level of . Press \ FWD or s REV.
radio volume compensation. . Press the f knob.
The display times out after EQ (Equalization): Press this .
button to choose bass and treble Press the softkey under the
approximately 10 seconds. desired tab.
Each higher setting allows equalization settings designed
for more radio volume for different types of music. 3. Adjust the setting by doing one
compensation at faster Selecting MANUAL or changing of the following:
vehicle speeds. bass or treble, returns the EQ to
the manual bass and treble settings.
. Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source. . Press SEEK or SEEK.

If a station's frequency is weak or if Unique EQ settings can be saved Adjusting the Speakers
there is static, decrease the treble. for each source. (Balance/Fade) Radio with
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, If the radio has a Bose audio CD (MP3)
or treble to the middle position, system, the EQ settings are either BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):
press the softkey positioned under MANUAL or TALK. To adjust the balance or fade:
the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
more than two seconds. A beep Adjusting the Speakers 1. Press the f knob until the
sounds and the level adjusts to (Balance/Fade) Radio with CD speaker control tabs display.
the middle position. To adjust the balance or fade: 2. Highlight the desired speaker
To quickly adjust all tone and 1. Press the ` button or press control tab by doing one of the
speaker controls to the middle following:
the f knob until the speaker
position, press the f knob for
control label displays. . Press the f knob.
more than two seconds until a
beep sounds. 2. To adjust the setting, do one of . Press the softkey under the
the following: desired tab.
EQ (Equalization): Press this
button to choose bass and treble . Turn the f knob. 3. Adjust the setting by doing one
equalization settings designed for of the following:
different types of music. Selecting . Press SEEK or SEEK. . Turn the f knob clockwise
MANUAL or changing bass or treble
returns the EQ to the manual bass
. Press \ FWD or s REV. or counterclockwise.
and treble settings. . Press SEEK or SEEK.

To quickly adjust all speaker and Radio 4 (Information) (RDS Features):

tone controls to the middle position, For vehicles with RDS features,
press the f knob for more than AM-FM Radio press 4 to display additional
two seconds. text information related to
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is Radio Data System (RDS) the current FM-RDS station.
turned on, the radio disables FADE The radio may have RDS. The RDS If information is available, the
and mutes the rear speakers. feature is available for use only on song title information displays
FM stations that broadcast RDS on the top line of the display and
Radio Messages information. This system relies upon artist information displays on the
Calibration Error: Displays if receiving specific information from bottom line. When information is
the radio is no longer calibrated these stations and only works when not available, NO INFO displays.
properly for the vehicle. The vehicle the information is available. While Auto Text (RDS Features): If
must be returned to your dealer for the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS additional information is available
service. station, the station name or call for the current song being played,
Loc or Locked: Displays when the letters display. In rare cases, a radio Auto Text will automatically
TheftLock system has activated. station could broadcast incorrect page/scroll the information
Take the vehicle to your dealer for information that causes the radio every three seconds above the
service. features to work improperly. If this FAV presets on the radio display.
happens, contact the radio station. By default, Auto Text is enabled.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer.

To change the Auto Text setting: SEEK: Press to seek or scan SEEK: Press to seek or scan
1. Press MENU to display the radio stations with a strong signal in the stations with a strong signal in the
setup menu. selected band. selected band.
2. Press the softkey under . To seek stations, press and . To seek stations, press and
AUTO TXT tab on the radio release SEEK to go to the release SEEK to go to the
display. previous station and stay there. next station and stay there.
3. Press the softkey under the ON . To scan stations, press and hold . To scan stations, press and hold
or OFF tab on the radio display. SEEK for a few seconds until SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio the radio beeps once. The radio
If 4 is pressed and the song title goes to a station, plays for a few goes to a station, plays for a few
or artist information is longer seconds, then goes to the next seconds, then goes to the next
than what can be displayed, the
extra information will page every station. Press SEEK again to station. Press SEEK again to
three seconds when Auto Text stop scanning. stop scanning.
is activated. . To scan preset stations in the . To scan preset stations in the
selected band, press and hold selected band, press and hold
Finding a Station SEEK for four seconds until a SEEK for four seconds until a
BAND: Press to choose double beep sounds. The radio double beep sounds. The radio
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM goes to a stored preset, plays goes to a stored preset, plays
(if equipped) on the Radio with CD for a few seconds, then goes for a few seconds, then goes
(Base). Press to choose between to the next stored preset. Press to the next stored preset. Press
FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on the SEEK again to stop scanning SEEK again to stop scanning
Radio with CD (MP3). preset stations. preset stations.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio
stations.

Storing Radio Stations Storing a Radio Station as a 3. Press and hold one of the
Preset, Radio with CD (Base) 6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
Drivers are encouraged to store
radio station while the vehicle is Radios that have numbered 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
parked. See Defensive Driving on pushbuttons store radio stations store additional radio stations.
page 92. Tune to stored radio as presets. The number of favorites pages can
stations using the presets, favorites Up to 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, be set up using the MENU button.
button, and steering wheel controls, and 6 AM), can be programmed To set up the number of favorites
if the vehicle has this feature. on the six numbered buttons. pages:
Radios that have a FAV button To store preset stations: 1. Press the MENU button.
store radio stations as favorites, up
to 36 stations can be programmed 1. Tune to a radio station. 2. Press the softkey located below
as favorites using the 6 softkeys 2. Press and hold one of the the FAV 1-6 tab.
below the radio station frequency 6 numbered pushbuttons for 3. Select the number of favorites
tabs and by using the FAV button. 3 seconds until a beep sounds. pages by pressing the softkey
Press the FAV button to go through located below the displayed
up to 6 pages of favorites, each 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to store
additional radio stations. page numbers.
having 6 favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites 4. Press the FAV button, or let
Storing a Radio Station as a the menu time out, to return
can contain any combination of AM, Favorite, Radio with CD (MP3)
FM, or XM, if equipped, stations. to the original main radio
Radios that have a FAV button store screen showing the radio
Radios that do not have a radio stations as favorites. station frequency tabs and
FAV button store radio stations to begin the process of
as presets, up to 18 stations To store a station as a favorite:
programming favorites.
(6 FM1, 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can be 1. Tune to a radio station.
programmed on the 6 numbered 2. Press the FAV button to display
pushbuttons. the page where the station will
be stored.

Satellite Radio 4 (Information) (XM Satellite To change the Auto Text setting:
Radio Service): For vehicles 1. Press MENU to display the radio
XM Satellite Radio Service
with XM, press 4 to display setup menu.
XM is a satellite radio service additional text information 2. Press the softkey under
that is based in the 48 contiguous related to the current XM channel. AUTO TXT tab on the radio
United States and 10 Canadian If information is available, the display.
provinces. XM Satellite Radio song title information displays
has a wide variety of programming on the top line of the display and 3. Press the softkey under the ON
and commercial-free music, artist information displays on the or OFF tab on the radio display.
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality bottom line. When information is If 4 is pressed and the song title
sound. A service fee is required not available, NO INFO displays.
to receive the XM service. If XM or artist information is longer
Service needs to be reactivated, the Auto Text (Satellite Radio than what can be displayed, the
radio will display No Subscription Service): If additional information extra information will page every
Please Renew on channel XM1. is available for the current song three seconds when Auto Text is
For more information, contact being played, Auto Text will activated.
XM at www.xmradio.com or automatically page/scroll the
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. information every three seconds
and www.xmradio.ca or call above the FAV presets on the
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. radio display. By default, Auto
Text is enabled.

Finding an XM Channel s REV: Press to go to the 2. Press either of the two softkeys
previous XM category. below the desired category tab
BAND: Press to switch between
to immediately tune to the first
AM, FM, or XM, if equipped. \ FWD: Press to go to the next XM station in that category.
f (Tune): Turn to manually select XM category.
To go to the previous or next XM
an XM channel. Finding a Category (CAT) station in the selected category,
SEEK: Press to go to the Channel do one of the following:
previous XM channel.
To find XM channels in a category: . Turn the f knob.
. To scan stations, press and hold
1. Press the CAT button to display Press the softkey below the
SEEK for a few seconds until the category tabs. Continue
.
the radio beeps once. The radio right or left arrows in the
pressing the CAT button until the category tab.
goes to a cahnnel, plays for a
desired category name displays.
few seconds, then goes to the . Press SEEK or SEEK.
next station. Press SEEK
. Radios with CD and DVD
again to stop scanning. can also navigate the 3. To exit the category search
category list by pressing mode, press the FAV button
SEEK: Press to go to the next the \ FWD or the s REV or BAND button to display the
XM channel. favorites again.
button.
. To scan stations, press and hold
SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few
seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press SEEK again to
stop scanning.

Adding and Removing Categories Storing XM Channels Storing an XM Channel as a

Categories cannot be added or Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to store
removed while the vehicle is moving radio station while the vehicle is To store a station as a favorite:
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). parked. See Defensive Driving on 1. Tune to an XM channel.
To add or remove a category: page 92. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites 2. Press the FAV button to display
1. Press the MENU button. button, and steering wheel controls, the page where the station will
2. Press the softkey located below if the vehicle has this feature. be stored.
the XM CAT tab. Up to 36 stations can be 3. Press and hold one of the
programmed as favorites using 6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
3. Turn the f knob to display the
the 6 softkeys below the radio 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
category you want to add or
station frequency tabs and by store additional radio stations.
remove.
using the FAV button. Press the
4. Press the softkey located under FAV button to go through up to
the Add or Remove tab. 6 pages of favorites, each having
To restore all removed 6 favorite stations available per
categories, press the softkey page. Each page of favorites can
under the Restore All tab. contain any combination of AM,
FM, or XM, if equipped, stations.
5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.

The number of favorites pages can XM Radio Messages Channel Unauth : This channel is
be set up using the MENU button. blocked or cannot be received with
XL (Explicit Language
To set up the number of favorites your XM subscription package.
Channels): These channels,
pages: Channel Unavail: This previously
or any others, can be blocked at
1. Press the MENU button. a customer's request, by calling assigned channel is no longer
2. Press the softkey located below 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and assigned. Tune to another station.
the FAV 1-6 tab. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station
3. Select the number of favorites XM Updating: The encryption
for that preset button.
pages by pressing the softkey code in the receiver is being
located below the displayed updated, and no action is required. No Artist Info: No artist
page numbers. This process should take no longer information is available at this
than 30 seconds. time on this channel. The system
4. Press the FAV button, or let is working properly.
the menu time out, to return No XM Signal: The system
to the original main radio is functioning correctly, but the No Title Info: No song title
screen showing the radio vehicle is in a location that is information is available at this
station frequency tabs and blocking the XM signal. When time on this channel. The system
to begin the process of the vehicle is moved into an open is working properly.
programming favorites. area, the signal should return. No CAT Info: No category
Loading XM: The audio system is information is available at this
acquiring and processing audio and time on this channel. The system
text data. No action is needed. This is working properly.
message should disappear shortly. No Information: No text or
Channel Off Air: This channel is informational messages are
not currently in service. Tune in to available at this time on this
another channel. channel. The system is working
properly.

No Subscription Please Renew: Unknown: If this message is Radio Reception

XM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0,
reactivated. Contact XM at there could be a receiver fault. Frequency interference and
www.xmradio.com or call Consult with your dealer. static can occur during normal
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. radio reception if items such
Check Antenna: If this message as cell phone chargers, vehicle
and www.xmradio.ca or call does not clear within a short period
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. convenience accessories, and
of time, the receiver or antenna external electronic devices are
CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with plugged into the accessory power
channels available for the selected your dealer. outlet. If there is interference or
category. The system is working Check XM Receivr: If this static, unplug the item from the
properly. message does not clear within a accessory power outlet.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver short period of time, the receiver
in the vehicle could have previously could have a fault. Consult with
AM
been in another vehicle. For security your dealer. The range for most AM stations is
purposes, XM receivers cannot be greater than for FM, especially at
XM Not Available: If this message
swapped between vehicles. If this night. The longer range can cause
does not clear within a short period
message is received after having of time, the receiver could have a station frequencies to interfere
the vehicle serviced, check with with each other. For better radio
fault. Consult with your dealer.
your dealer. reception, most AM radio stations
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, boost the power levels during the
this message alternates with the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
occur when things like storms and
This label is needed to activate
the service. power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo Cellular Phone Usage damaged, it could interfere with

radio reception. For proper radio
FM signals only reach about Cellular phone usage may cause
reception, the antenna connector
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although interference with the vehicle's
needs to be properly attached to
the radio has a built-in electronic radio. This interference may occur
the post on the glass.
circuit that automatically works to when making or receiving phone
reduce interference, some static calls, charging the phone's battery, If a cellular telephone antenna
can occur, especially around tall or simply having the phone on. needs to be attached to the glass,
buildings or hills, causing the This interference causes an make sure that the grid lines for the
sound to fade in and out. increased level of static while AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
listening to the radio. If static is There is enough space between
XM Satellite Radio Service received while listening to the the grid lines to attach a cellular
XM Satellite Radio Service gives radio, unplug the cellular phone telephone antenna without
digital radio reception from coast and turn it off. interfering with radio reception.
to coast in the 48 contiguous Notice: Using a razor blade or
United States, and in Canada. Backglass Antenna sharp object to clear the inside
Just as with FM, tall buildings or rear window can damage the rear
The AM-FM antenna is integrated
hills can interfere with satellite radio window antenna and/or the rear
signals, causing the sound to fade with the rear window defogger,
located in the rear window. Make window defogger. Repairs would
in and out. In addition, traveling not be covered by the vehicle
sure that the inside surface of the
or standing under heavy foliage, warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window is not scratched and
bridges, garages, or tunnels may rear window with sharp objects.
cause loss of the XM signal for a that the lines on the glass are not
period of time. damaged. If the inside surface is

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket Audio Players Notice: If a label is added to a

glass tinting with metallic film. CD, more than one CD is inserted
The metallic film in some tinting into the slot at a time, or an
materials will interfere with CD Player attempt is made to play scratched
or distort the incoming radio Some CD players can play MP3 or damaged CDs, the CD player
reception. Any damage caused CD-R or CD-RW discs. See MP3 could be damaged. While using
to your backglass antenna due later in this section for more the CD player, use only CDs in
to metallic tinting materials will information. good condition without any label,
not be covered by the vehicle load one CD at a time, and keep
warranty. The CD player can play the smaller the CD player and the loading slot
8 cm (3 in) single discs with an free of foreign materials, liquids,
adapter ring.
Satellite Radio Antenna and debris.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna Care of the CD Player If an error displays, see CD
is located on the roof of the Do not add labels to a disc. It could Messages later in this section.
vehicle. Keep the antenna clear get caught in the CD player. Use a
of obstructions for clear radio marking pen to write on the top of
reception. the disc if a description is needed.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the Do not use CD lens cleaners.
performance of the XM system They could damage the CD player.
(if equipped) may be affected if
the sunroof is open.

Care of CDs Use an adapter ring when playing Buttons and Knobs
the smaller 8 cm (3 in) discs. The buttons and knobs on the radio
Store a disc in its original case or
Smaller discs with the adapter control the following features.
a protective case and away from
ring are loaded the same way
direct sunlight and dust. If the f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
as a full-size disc.
bottom of a disc is damaged it may the CD.
not play properly or at all. Do not Ejecting a Disc
touch the bottom of a disc while SEEK: Press to go to the start
handling it, pick it up by grasping Z EJECT: Press to eject the of the current track, if more than
the outer edges or the edge of the disc. If the disc is not removed after 10 seconds have played. Press
hole and the outer edge. several seconds, the CD player and hold or press multiple times
automatically pulls the disc back in. to continue moving backward
If the surface of a disc is dirty, take through the tracks on the CD.
a soft, lintfree cloth or dampen a Playing a CD
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral When a CD is inserted into the
SEEK: Press to go to the next
detergent solution mixed with water, track. Press and hold or press
player, the CD symbol displays.
and clean it. Make sure the wiping multiple times to continue moving
As each new track starts to play,
process starts from the center to forward through the tracks on
the track number displays.
the edge. the CD.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
Inserting a Disc when a CD is in the player, the CD
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly within a
Insert the disc partway into the slot, stays in the player. If the ignition
track. Sound is heard at a reduced
label side up. The player pulls it in or radio is turned on when a CD is
volume and the elapsed time of the
and the disc begins playing. in the player, the CD starts to play
track displays. Release to resume
where it stopped, if it was the last
playing the track.
selected audio source.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Softkeys The radio can also play discs that
and hold to advance playback The six softkeys below the radio contain both uncompressed CD
quickly within a track. Sound is display are used to control functions audio and MP3 files. When a disc
heard at a reduced volume and that display as tabs. contains both types of audio, the CD
the elapsed time of the track player reads all MP3 files first, then
displays. Release to resume The softkeys below the radio display the uncompressed CD audio files.
playing the track. control the following features.
Supported File and Folder
4 (Information): Press to display RDM (Random): Tracks can be Structure
available additional information listened to in random, rather than
sequential order. The radio supports:
about the current track.
To use random:
. Up to 50 folders.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD 1. Press the softkey below the
. Up to 8 folders in depth.
remains inside the CD player. RDM tab until Random Current . Up to 50 playlists.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press Disc displays. . Up to 255 files.
to play a CD while listening to the 2. Press the softkey again to turn .
radio or a portable audio device. off random play. Playlists with an .m3u or
Press this button again and the .wpl extension.
system automatically searches for MP3 Supported Files . Files with an .mp3 or .cda file
an auxiliary input device, such as a The Radio with CD (MP3) has the extension.
portable audio player. If a portable capability of playing an MP3 CD-R
audio player is not connected, or CD-RW disc.
No Aux Input Device Found may
display.

Root Directory Track names longer than Playing an MP3

The root directory is treated as a 32 characters or 4 pages are
shortened. The display does not Order of Play
folder. Files are stored in the root
directory when the disc or storage show parts of words on the last Tracks are played in the following
device does not contain folders. page of text and the extension order:
Files accessed from the root of the filename is not displayed. . Play begins from the first track
directory of a disc display as Playlists in the first playlist and continues
F1 ROOT. sequentially through all tracks
Discs that have playlists that
in each playlist. When the last
Empty Folder were created using WinAmp,
track of the last playlist has
Folders that do not contain files are MusicMatch, or Real Jukebox
played, play continues from
skipped, and the player advances to software can be accessed; however,
the first track of the first playlist.
the next folder that contains files. there is no playlist editing capability
using the radio. These playlists are . Play begins from the first track
File Naming treated as special folders containing in the first folder and continues
compressed audio song files. sequentially through all tracks in
The song name that displays is the
each folder. When the last track
song name that is contained in the
of the last folder has played,
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
play continues from the first
present in the ID3 tag, then the
track of the first folder.
radio displays the file name without
the file extension as the track name. When playback starts from a new
folder, the new track name displays
unless folder mode has been
chosen as the default display, then
the new folder name displays.

Buttons and Knobs \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Softkeys

The buttons and knobs on the radio and hold to advance playback The six softkeys below the radio
control the following features. quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced display are used to control functions
volume and the elapsed time of the that display as tabs.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files
on the disc. track displays. Release \ FWD to The softkeys below the radio display
resume playing. control the following features.
SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than 10 seconds 4 (Information): Press to display S c (Previous Folder): Press
have played. Press and hold or available additional information
the softkey below S c to go to the
press multiple times to continue about the current track.
first track in the previous folder.
moving backward through tracks. BAND: Press to listen to the
radio while an MP3 disc is playing. c T (Next Folder): Press the
SEEK: Press to go to the next
softkey below c T to go to the
track. Press and hold or press The MP3 disc remains inside the
multiple times to continue moving CD player. first track in the next folder.
forward through tracks. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to RDM (Random): MP3 files can
s REV (Reverse): Press and play an MP3 disc while listening to be listened to on a CD in random,
hold to reverse playback quickly. the radio or a portable audio device. rather than sequential order.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume Press this button again and the To use random:
and the elapsed time of the track system automatically searches for 1. Press the softkey under the
an auxiliary input device, such as a
displays. Release s REV to RDM tab until Random Current
portable audio player. If a portable Disc displays to play songs from
resume playing. audio player is not connected, the current CD in random order.
No Aux Input Device Found may
display. 2. Press the same softkey again to
turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press the To change from playback by artist to CD Player Messages
playback by album:
softkey below h to have the files CHECK DISC: If an error message
played in order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey located below displays and/or the disc comes out,
The player scans the disc to sort the Sort By tab. it could be for one of the following
the files by artist and album ID3 tag 2. Press one of the softkeys below reasons:
information. It can take several the Album tab from the sort . The CD player is very hot.
minutes to scan the disc depending screen. When the temperature returns
on the number of files on the disc. to normal, the disc should play.
The radio may begin playing while 3. Press the softkey below the
it is scanning in the background. Back tab to return to the main . The road is very rough. When
music navigator screen. the road becomes smoother,
When the scan is finished, the the disc should play.
disc begins playing files in order The album name displays on the
by artist. The current artist playing second line between the arrows . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
is shown on the second line of the and songs from the current album or upside down.
display. Once all songs by that artist begins to play. Once all songs . The air is very humid. If so, wait
are played, the player moves to the from that album have played, the
about an hour and try again.
next artist in alphabetical order and player moves to the next album in
begins playing files by that artist. alphabetical order on the disc and . A problem occurred while
begins playing MP3 files from that burning the disc.
To listen to files by another artist, album. . The label is caught in the CD
press the softkey located below
either arrow tab. The disc goes To exit music navigator mode, press player.
to the next or previous artist in the softkey below the Back tab to If the disc is not playing correctly
alphabetical order. Continue return to normal MP3 playback. for any other reason, try a known
pressing either softkey below the good disc.
arrow tab until the desired artist
displays.

If any error occurs repeatedly or To use a portable audio player, Phone

if an error cannot be corrected, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
contact your dealer. If the radio the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
displays an error message, write it While a device is connected, press Bluetooth
down and provide it to your dealer the radio CD/AUX button to begin For vehicles equipped with
when reporting the problem. playing audio from the device over Bluetooth capability, the system
the vehicle speakers. can interact with many cell phones,
Auxiliary Devices O (Power/Volume): Turn to allowing:
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack increase or decrease the volume . Placement and receipt of calls in
of the portable player. Additional a hands-free mode.
The radio system has an auxiliary volume adjustments might need to
input jack located on the lower be made from the portable device.
. Sharing of the cell phones
right side of the faceplate. This is address book or contact list
BAND: Press to listen to the radio with the vehicle.
not an audio output; do not plug
while a portable audio device is
the headphone set into the front To minimize driver distraction,
playing. The portable audio device
auxiliary input jack. However, an before driving, and with the vehicle
continues playing until it is stopped
external audio device such as an parked:
or turned off.
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
. Become familiar with the
CD changer, or cassette tape player
can be connected to the auxiliary play a CD while a portable audio features of the cell phone.
input jack as another source for device is playing. Press again and Organize the phone book and
the system begins playing audio contact lists clearly and delete
audio listening.
from the connected portable audio duplicate or rarely used entries.
Drivers are encouraged to set If possible, program speed dial
player. If a portable audio player is
up any auxiliary device while the or other shortcuts.
not connected, No Aux Input Device
vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
Found may display. . Review the controls and
Driving on page 92 for more
information on driver distraction. operation of the infotainment
and navigation system.


. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. A Bluetooth system can use a Voice Recognition
The system may not work with Bluetoothcapable cell phone with
all cell phones. See Pairing in The Bluetooth system uses voice
a HandsFree Profile to make and
this section for more information. recognition to interpret voice
receive phone calls. The system
commands to dial phone numbers
. If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the
and name tags.
dialing capability, learn to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
use that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth For additional information, say
address book or contact list. system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Help while you are in a voice
See Voice Pass-Thru in this Not all phones support all functions, recognition menu.
section for more information. and not all phones are guaranteed Noise: Keep interior noise levels
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth to a minimum. The system may not
. See Storing and Deleting Phone system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
Numbers in this section for recognize voice commands if there
for more information on compatible is too much background noise.
more information. phones.
When to Speak: A short tone
{ WARNING sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a
When using a cell phone, it can voice command. Wait until the tone
be distracting to look too long and then speak.
or too often at the screen of How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
the phone or the infotainment calm and natural voice.
(navigation) system. Taking
your eyes off the road too long
or too often could cause a crash
resulting in injury or death. Focus
your attention on driving.

Audio System Pairing

. Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
When using the invehicle A Bluetooth cell phone must be system at a time.
Bluetooth system, sound comes paired to the Bluetooth system
through the vehicle's front audio and then connected to the vehicle
. If multiple paired cell phones
system speakers and overrides before it can be used. See the cell are within range of the system,
the audio system. Use the audio phone manufacturer's user guide for the system connects to the first
system volume knob, during a Bluetooth functions before pairing available paired cell phone in the
call, to change the volume level. the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone order that they were first paired
The adjusted volume level remains is not connected, calls will be made to the system. To connect to a
in memory for later calls. To prevent using OnStar HandsFree Calling, different paired phone, see
missed calls, a minimum volume if equipped. Refer to the OnStar Connecting to a Different
level is used if the volume is turned Owner's Guide for more information. Phone later in this section.
down too low. Pairing a Phone
Pairing Information
Bluetooth Controls . Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press and hold b g for
Use the buttons located on the paired to the Bluetooth system. two seconds.
steering wheel to operate the . The pairing process is disabled 2. Say Bluetooth.
invehicle Bluetooth system. when the vehicle is moving.
See Steering Wheel Controls on 3. Say Pair. The system responds
. Pairing only needs to be with instructions and a fourdigit
completed once, unless the Personal Identification Number
b g (Push To Talk): Press to pairing information on the cell (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
answer incoming calls, confirm phone changes or the cell phone
system information, and start is deleted from the system.
speech recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
operation.

4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
cell phone that you want to pair. Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
For help with this process, see The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
the cell phone manufacturer's paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
user guide. also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell
5. Locate the device named Your system responds with is connected phones were paired. Depending
Vehicle in the list on the cell after that phone name. on which cell phone you want to
phone. Follow the instructions connect to, you may have to use
on the cell phone to enter the 1. Press and hold b g for this command several times.
PIN that was provided in Step 3. two seconds.
After the PIN is successfully 2. Say Bluetooth.
1. Press and hold b g for
entered, the system prompts you two seconds.
to provide a name for the paired 3. Say List.
2. Say Bluetooth.
cell phone. This name will be Deleting a Paired Phone
used to indicate which phones 3. Say Change phone.
are paired and connected to the If the phone name you want to . If another cell phone is
vehicle. See Listing All Paired delete is unknown, see Listing All found, the response will
and Connected Phones later in Paired and Connected Phones. be <Phone name> is now
this section for more information. 1. Press and hold b g for connected.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair two seconds. . If another cell phone is not
additional phones. 2. Say Bluetooth. found, the original phone
remains connected.
3. Say Delete. The system asks
which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.

Storing and Deleting Phone Using the Store Command To hear all of the numbers
Numbers recognized by the system,
1. Press and hold b g for say Verify at any time.
The system can store up to two seconds.
30 phone numbers as name tags
2. Say Store.
in the HandsFree Directory that is two seconds.
shared between the Bluetooth and 3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store 2. Say Digit Store.
OnStar systems, if equipped.
all at once with no pauses, then 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
The following commands are used
follow the directions given by the that you want to store. After
to delete and store phone numbers.
system to save a name tag for each digit is entered, the system
Store: This command will store this number. repeats back the digit it heard
a phone number, or a group of followed by a tone. After the
numbers as a name tag. Using the Digit Store Command last digit has been entered,
Digit Store: This command allows If an unwanted number is say Store, and then follow the
a phone number to be stored as a recognized by the system, say directions given by the system to
name tag by entering the digits one Clear at any time to clear the save a name tag for this number.
at a time. last number.
Using the Delete Command
Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
two seconds.
Delete All Name Tags: This
2. Say Delete.
command deletes all stored
name tags in the HandsFree 3. Say the name tag you want to
Calling Directory and the OnStar delete.
TurnbyTurn Destinations
Directory, if equipped.

Using the Delete All Name Tags Making a Call Using the Digit Dial Command
Command The digit dial command allows a
Calls can be made using the
This command deletes all stored following commands. phone number to be dialed by
name tags in the HandsFree entering the digits one at a time.
Dial or Call: The dial or
Calling Directory and the OnStar After each digit is entered, the
call command can be used
TurnbyTurn Destinations Directory, system repeats back the digit it
interchangeably to dial a phone
if equipped. heard followed by a tone.
number or a stored name tag.
To delete all name tags: If an unwanted number is
Digit Dial: This command allows
recognized by the system, say
1. Press and hold b g for a phone number to be dialed by
Clear at any time to clear the
two seconds. entering the digits one at a time.
last number.
2. Say Delete all name tags. Redial: This command is used to
To hear all of the numbers
dial the last number used on the cell
Listing Stored Numbers recognized by the system,
phone.
say Verify at any time.
The list command will list all stored Using the Dial or Call
numbers and name tags. Command 1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
Using the List Command 1. Press and hold b g for 2. Say Digit Dial.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
two seconds. 2. Say Dial or Call. that you want to dial. After each
2. Say Directory. 3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system
3. Say HandsFree Calling. pausing, or say the name tag. repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
4. Say List. Once connected, the person called
last digit has been entered,
will be heard through the audio
say Dial.
speakers.

Once connected, the person called Call Waiting ThreeWay Calling

Call waiting must be supported on Threeway calling must be
speakers.
the cell phone and enabled by the supported on the cell phone and
Using the Redial Command wireless service carrier. enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. Press and hold b g for . Press b g to answer an
two seconds. incoming call when another 1. While on a call, press b g.
call is active. The original call 2. Say Threeway call.
2. After the tone, say Redial.
is placed on hold.
Once connected, the person called 3. Use the dial or call command to
. Press b g again to return to the dial the number of the third party
speakers. original call. to be called.
Receiving a Call
. To ignore the incoming call, no 4. Once the call is connected,
action is required. press b g to link all callers
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring . Press c x to disconnect the together.
tone is heard in the vehicle. current call and switch to the call Ending a Call
on hold.
. Press b g to answer the call. Press c x to end a call.
. Press c x to ignore a call.

Muting a Call Transferring Audio from the Voice Pass-Thru

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call, all sounds from inside Voice passthru allows access to
the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the the voice recognition commands on
person on the other end of the call vehicle: the cell phone. See your cell phone
cannot hear them. manufacturer's user guide to see if
1. Press b g. the cell phone supports this feature.
. To mute a call, press b g, and 2. Say Transfer Call.
then say Mute call. To access contacts stored in the cell
Transferring Audio to the phone:
. To cancel mute, press b g, and Bluetooth System from a Cell
then say Unmute call. Phone
two seconds.
Transferring a Call During a call with the audio on the
2. Say Bluetooth. The system
Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press b g. The audio responds Bluetooth ready,
the Bluetooth system and the cell transfers to the vehicle. If the audio followed by a tone.
phone. does not transfer to the vehicle,
use the audio transfer feature on 3. Say Voice. The system
The cell phone must be paired the cell phone. See your cell phone responds OK, accessing
and connected with the Bluetooth manufacturer's user guide for more <phone name>.
system before a call can be information. The cell phone's normal prompt
transferred. The connection process
messages will go through their cycle
can take up to two minutes after the
according to the phone's operating
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

(DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out
The Bluetooth system can send of the invehicle Bluetooth system,
numbers and the numbers stored it will be retained indefinitely.
as name tags during a call. This includes all saved name tags in
You can use this feature when the phone book and phone pairing
calling a menudriven phone information. For information on how
system. Account numbers can to delete this information, see the
also be stored for use. previous section Deleting a Paired
Phone and the previous sections
Sending a Number or Name Tag on deleting name tags.
During a Call
Other Information
1. Press b g. The system
responds Ready, followed The Bluetooth word mark and
by a tone. logos are owned by the Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
2. Say Dial. by General Motors is under license.
3. Say the number or name tag Other trademarks and trade names
to send. are those of their respective owners.

2 NOTES

Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

This vehicle may have a dual or single climate control system. The heating,
Climate Control Systems cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation can be controlled with this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 For vehicles with heated seats, see Heated Front Seats on page 37.
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
A. Fan Control F. Driver and Passenger Heated

B. Outside Air Seats
C. Recirculation G. Driver and Passenger

Temperature Controls
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
H. Rear Window Defogger
E. Air Conditioning

8-2 Climate Controls
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise

or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Positioning
the knob between two modes can
select a combination of those
modes.
If the airflow seems low when the
fan is at the highest setting, the
passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. There
will be some airflow noticeable
from the various outlets when
Single Zone driving, even with the fan in the
off position. For more information,
A. Fan Control Temperature Control: For dual see Passenger Compartment Air
B. Outside Air zone, turn the thumbwheels up Filter on page 85 and Scheduled
or down to increase or decrease Maintenance on page 112.
C. Temperature Control the temperature on the driver or
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
D. Recirculation the passenger side of the vehicle.
clockwise or counterclockwise to
For single zone, turn the knob
E. Air Delivery Mode Control change the direction of the airflow
clockwise or counterclockwise
inside the vehicle.
F. Air Conditioning to increase or decrease the
temperature.
G. Rear Window Defogger

To change the current mode, select the side window vents and the floor For quick cool down on hot days, do
one of the following: vents. When defrost is selected, the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the the system automatically forces
outside air into the vehicle. The air 1. Select the H mode.
instrument panel outlets.
conditioning compressor will run 2. Press the # button.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided automatically in this setting, unless
between the instrument panel the outside temperature is below 3. Select the coolest temperature
outlets and the floor outlets. 4C (40F). for both zones.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the # (Air Conditioning): Press 4. Select the highest 9 speed.
floor outlets, with some of the air to turn the air conditioning system
directed to the windshield and on or off. An indicator light comes 5. When the coolest temperature
side window outlets. In this mode, on to show that it is on. The air is selected in the A/C mode,
the system automatically selects conditioning can be selected in any the system automatically goes
outside air. mode as long as the fan is on and into the recirculation mode to
the outside temperature is above improve cooling.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windshield of fog or moisture. Air is freezing. A flashing indicator light Using these settings together for
directed equally to the windshield indicates that the air conditioning long periods of time may cause the
and the floor outlets. When defog compressor is currently not air inside the vehicle to become too
is selected, the system turns off available. dry. To prevent this from happening,
recirculation and runs the air On hot days, open the windows to after the air inside the vehicle has
conditioning compressor unless let hot inside air escape; then close cooled, turn the recirculation
the outside temperature is below them. This helps to reduce the time mode off.
4C (40F). it takes for the vehicle to cool down. The air conditioning system
0 (Defrost): This mode clears It also helps the system to operate removes moisture from the air,
the windshield of fog or frost more efficiently. so a small amount of water may
more quickly. Air is directed to drip under the vehicle while idling
the windshield with some air to or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.

: (Outside Air): Press to turn Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with heated outside
on outside air. An indicator light rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat
The rear window defogger uses a
comes on to show that it is on. to help clear fog or frost from the
warming grid to remove fog from the
Outside air will circulate throughout surface of the mirror when the rear
rear window.
the vehicle. window defog button is pressed.
< (Rear Window Defogger): See Power Mirrors on page 214.
? (Recirculation): Press to The rear window defogger turns
turn on the recirculation mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
off automatically after it has been
An indicator light comes on to windows are clear.
activated for 10 minutes. It can be
show that it is on. turned off manually, by pressing Notice: Do not use anything
This mode helps to quickly heat the button again or by turning the sharp on the inside of the rear
or cool the air inside the vehicle ignition to the LOCK/OFF position. window. If you do, you could
once the temperature inside the The rear window defogger can cut or damage the warming grid,
vehicle is equal to or better than be turned on again for additional and the repairs would not be
the outside temperature. It can be window clearing. The length of covered by the vehicle warranty.
used to prevent outside air and defogger operation will increase Do not attach a temporary vehicle
odors from entering the vehicle. if the vehicle is being driven. license, tape, a decal, or anything
The recirculation mode is not similar to the defogger grid.
available in outside air, floor, defog,
or defrost modes. If the button is
selected while in these modes,
the indicator flashes three times.


. If the airflow seems low when
Air Vents the fan is at the highest setting, Maintenance
Use the thumbwheel located the passenger compartment air
below or to the side of the outlet, to filter, if equipped, may need to Passenger Compartment
change the direction of the air flow. replaced. For more information, Air Filter
see Passenger Compartment
Operation Tips Air Filter on page 85 and The vehicle has a passenger
Scheduled Maintenance on compartment particulate air
. Clear away any ice, snow, filter. It is located in the engine
or leaves from the air inlets at page 112.
compartment, below the air inlet
the base of the windshield that . If fogging reoccurs while in grille on the passenger side.
may block the flow of air into vent or bi-level modes with
the vehicle. mild temperature throughout The filter traps most of the
the vehicle, turn on the air pollen from air entering the
. Use of non-GM approved hood climate control system. It needs
deflectors may adversely affect conditioner to reduce windshield
fogging. to be changed periodically to
the performance of the system. ensure system performance.
. Keep the path under the front For information on how often
seats clear of objects to help to change the passenger
circulate the air inside the compartment air filter, see
vehicle more effectively. Scheduled Maintenance on
page 112.

To change the passenger 5. Lift the air inlet grille and

compartment air filter: disconnect the washer hose
1. Turn off the ignition when the at the quick-connect.
windshield wipers are in the up 6. Remove the air inlet grille.
position. 7. Remove the water deflector
2. Raise the vehicle hood. plate.
3. Pull back the hood weatherstrip 8. Remove the old passenger
from the passenger side of the compartment air filter.
vehicle halfway to center. 9. Reverse the steps to install the
new air filter.
For best climate control system
performance, reinstall the air filter.
For the type of filter to use, see
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 118.
4. Remove the air inlet grille

retainers.

Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Operating Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Engine Exhaust California Fuel
Driving Information Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Running the Vehicle While Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Automatic Transmission Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-38
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Filling a Portable Fuel
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Brakes Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Towing
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 General Towing
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Ride Control Systems Driving Characteristics and
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Traction Control Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Starting and Operating Electronic Stability Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17 Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Conversions and Add-Ons
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Cruise Control Add-On Electrical
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information WARNING (Continued)

Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that
Defensive driving means always anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
expect the unexpected. The first possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination,
step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life.
page 310. Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
Drunk Driving vehicle-related deaths involve
{ WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these
Assume that other road users { WARNING deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is In recent years, more than
drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with
what they might do and be ready. judgment can be affected by the use of alcohol, with about
In addition: even a small amount of alcohol. 250,000 people injured.
. Allow enough following You can have a serious or For persons under 21, it is against
distance between you and even fatal collision if you the law in every U.S. state to drink
the driver in front of you. drive after drinking. alcohol. There are good medical,
. Focus on the task of driving. Do not drink and drive or ride with psychological, and developmental
(Continued) a driver who has been drinking. reasons for these laws.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are The obvious way to eliminate the
with a group, designate a driver leading highway safety problem is
who will not drink. for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.

Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping

alcohol in a person's system distances vary greatly with the
can make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on surface of the road, whether it is
especially injuries to the brain, page 520. pavement or gravel; the condition
spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
drinking driver or passenger is to push the brake pedal is brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
in a crash, that person's chance of perception time. Actually doing and the amount of brake force
being killed or permanently disabled it is reaction time. applied.
is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy
been drinking. Average reaction time is about
threefourths of a second. But braking. Some people drive in
that is only an average. It might spurts heavy acceleration
Control of a Vehicle be less with one driver and as followed by heavy braking rather
The following three systems long as two or three seconds or than keeping pace with traffic.
help to control the vehicle while more with another. Age, physical This is a mistake. The brakes
driving brakes, steering, and condition, alertness, coordination, might not have time to cool between
accelerator. At times, as when and eyesight all play a part. So do hard stops. The brakes will wear
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But out much faster with a lot of heavy
ask more of those control systems even in threefourths of a second, braking. Keeping pace with the
than the tires and road can provide. a vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic following
Meaning, you can lose control of (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). distances eliminates a lot of
the vehicle. See Traction Control That could be a lot of distance unnecessary braking. That means
System (TCS) on page 929. in an emergency, so keeping better braking and longer brake life.
enough space between the
Adding nondealer accessories
vehicle and others is important.
can affect vehicle performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 103.

If the engine ever stops while Steering Try to adjust the speed so you can
the vehicle is being driven, brake drive through the curve. Maintain a
normally but do not pump the Power Steering reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
brakes. If the brakes are pumped, If power steering assist is lost accelerate until out of the curve,
the pedal could get harder to push because the engine stops or the and then accelerate gently into
down. If the engine stops, there will power steering system is not the straightaway.
still be some power brake assist but functioning, the vehicle can be
it will be used when the brake is Steering in Emergencies
steered but it will take more effort.
applied. Once the power assist is There are times when steering
used up, it can take longer to stop Steering Tips can be more effective than braking.
and the brake pedal will be harder For example, you come over a hill
It is important to take curves at a
to push. and find a truck stopped in your
reasonable speed.
Adding nondealer accessories lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
Traction in a curve depends on the from nowhere, or a child darts out
can affect vehicle performance.
condition of the tires and the road from between parked cars and stops
See Accessories and Modifications
surface, the angle at which the right in front of you. These problems
on page 103.
curve is banked, and vehicle speed. can be avoided by braking if you
While in a curve, speed is the one can stop in time. But sometimes you
factor that can be controlled. cannot stop in time because there
If there is a need to reduce speed, is no room. That is the time for
do it before entering the curve, while evasive action steering around
the front wheels are straight. the problem.

The vehicle can perform very recommended 9 and 3 o'clock Off-Road Recovery
well in emergencies like these. positions, it can be turned a full
First apply the brakes. See Braking 180 degrees very quickly without The vehicle's right wheels can drop
on page 93. It is better to remove removing either hand. But you have off the edge of a road onto the
as much speed as possible from to act fast, steer quickly, and just as shoulder while driving.
a collision. Then steer around quickly straighten the wheel once
the problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object.
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is

only slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the

Ease off the accelerator and Skidding If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
then, if there is nothing in the your foot off the accelerator pedal
In a skid, a driver can lose
way, steer so that the vehicle and quickly steer the way you
control of the vehicle. Defensive
straddles the edge of the pavement. want the vehicle to go. If you start
drivers avoid most skids by taking
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm steering quickly enough, the vehicle
reasonable care suited to existing
(3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn, may straighten out. Always be ready
conditions, and by not overdriving
until the right front tire contacts for a second skid if it occurs.
those conditions. But skids are
the pavement edge. Then turn the Of course, traction is reduced when
always possible.
steering wheel to go straight down water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
the roadway. The three types of skids
material is on the road. For safety,
correspond to the vehicle's three
slow down and adjust your driving
Loss of Control control systems. In the braking
to these conditions. It is important
skid, the wheels are not rolling.
Let us review what driving experts to slow down on slippery surfaces
In the steering or cornering skid,
say about what happens when the because stopping distance will be
too much speed or steering in a
three control systems brakes, longer and vehicle control more
curve causes tires to slip and
steering, and acceleration do not limited.
lose cornering force. And in the
have enough friction where the tires acceleration skid, too much throttle
meet the road to do what the driver causes the driving wheels to spin.
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.

While driving on a surface with Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

reduced traction, try to avoid
sudden steering, acceleration, Rain and wet roads can reduce
or braking, including reducing vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through
gear. Any sudden changes could Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the
cause the tires to slide. You may of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this
not realize the surface is slippery driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn deepstanding or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not
to recognize warning clues such ignore police warnings and be
as enough water, ice, or packed { WARNING very cautious about trying to
snow on the road to make a drive through flowing water.
mirrored surface and slow Wet brakes can cause crashes.
down when you have any doubt. They might not work as well in
a quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning
If the vehicle has the Antilock
Brake System (ABS), remember: It pulling to one side. You could Hydroplaning is dangerous.
helps avoid only the braking skid. lose control of the vehicle. Water can build up under the
If the vehicle does not have ABS, After driving through a large vehicle's tires so they actually
then in a braking skid, where the ride on the water. This can happen
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wheels are no longer rolling, release if the road is wet enough and you
wash, lightly apply the brake are going fast enough. When the
enough pressure on the brakes pedal until the brakes work
to get the wheels rolling again. vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little
normally. or no contact with the road.
This restores steering control.
Push the brake pedal down steadily (Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about
when you have to stop suddenly. hydroplaning. The best advice is to
As long as the wheels are rolling, slow down when the road is wet.
you will have steering control.

Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention Driving on steep hills or through
weather driving tips include: to your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
. Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
a safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include:
. Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape.
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and
reservoir filled.
. Keep interior temperature cool.
transmission.
. Have good tires with proper
. Keep your eyes moving scan .
the road ahead and to the sides. Shift to a lower gear when going
tread depth. See Tires on down steep or long hills.
page 1042. . Check the rearview mirror and
. Turn off cruise control. vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.


. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
dangerous. The brakes will The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 928 improves vehicle
have to do all the work of slowing Winter Driving stability during hard stops on
down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
You would then have poor braking Drive carefully when there is
or even none going down a hill. snow or ice between the tires Allow greater following distance
You could crash. Always have the and the road, creating less traction on any slippery road and watch
engine running and the vehicle or grip. Wet ice can occur at about for slippery spots. Icy patches can
in gear when going downhill. 0C (32F) when freezing rain occur on otherwise clear roads in
begins to fall, resulting in even shaded areas. The surface of a
less traction. Avoid driving on wet curve or an overpass can remain
. Stay in your own lane. icy when the surrounding roads
ice or in freezing rain until roads
Do not swing wide or cut are clear. Avoid sudden steering
can be treated with salt or sand.
across the center of the road. maneuvers and braking while
Drive at speeds that let you Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
stay in your own lane. condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Turn off cruise control on slippery
. Top of hills: Be surfaces.
quickly causes the wheels to spin
alert something
and makes the surface under the
could be in your lane
tires slick, so there is even less
(stalled car, accident).
traction.

Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 924.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program on page 136.
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
To get help and keep everyone in
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
the vehicle safe:
. Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
. Turn on the hazard warning Monoxide) gas to get inside.
time to be sure snow does
flashers. CO could overcome you and
not collect there.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside kill you. You cannot see it or
. Open a window about
mirror. smell it, so you might not know
5 cm (2 in) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from it is in your vehicle. Clear away
{ WARNING the wind to bring in fresh air. snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets is blocking the exhaust.
under the vehicle. This may on or under the instrument
cause exhaust gases to get panel.
Run the engine for short periods
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm,
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that but be careful.
cannot be seen or smelled. circulates the air inside
It can cause unconsciousness the vehicle and set the fan
and even death. speed to the highest setting.
(Continued) See Climate Control System
in the Index.
(Continued)

To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck
short periods as needed to warm { WARNING
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when If the vehicle's tires spin at high
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. speed, they can explode, and
until help arrives but only when you you or others could be injured.
If the vehicle has a traction system,
feel really uncomfortable from the it can often help to free a stuck The vehicle can overheat,
cold. Moving about to keep warm vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's causing an engine compartment
also helps. traction system in the Index. If stuck fire or other damage. Spin the
too severely for the traction system wheels as little as possible and
If it takes some time for help
to free the vehicle, turn the traction avoid going above 55 km/h
to arrive, now and then when
you run the engine, push the system off and use the rocking (35 mph).
accelerator pedal slightly so the method.
engine runs faster than the idle For information about using tire
speed. This keeps the battery chains on the vehicle, see Tire
charged to restart the vehicle Chains on page 1064.
and to signal for help with the
headlamps. Do this as little as
possible to save fuel.

Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits Tire and Loading Information
it Out Label
It is very important to know how
Turn the steering wheel left and much weight your vehicle can
right to clear the area around the carry. Two labels on your vehicle
front wheels. Turn off any traction
show how much weight it may
or stability system. Shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a properly carry, the Tire and
forward gear, spinning the wheels Loading Information label and
as little as possible. To prevent the Vehicle Certification label.
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting { WARNING
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press Do not load the vehicle
lightly on the accelerator pedal any heavier than the
when the transmission is in gear. Gross Vehicle Weight Label Example
Slowly spinning the wheels in the Rating (GVWR), or either the
forward and reverse directions A vehicle-specific Tire and
maximum front or rear Gross Loading Information label
causes a rocking motion that could Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
free the vehicle. If that does not is attached to the vehicle's
get the vehicle out after a few
This can cause systems to center pillar (B-pillar). With
tries, it might need to be towed break and change the way the the driver door open, you will
out. If the vehicle does need to be vehicle handles. This could find the label attached below
towed out, see Towing the Vehicle cause loss of control and a the door lock post (striker).
on page 1079. crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.

The Tire and Loading There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined
Information label lists the information on the Certification weight of the driver and
number of occupant seating label. It tells you the Gross passengers from XXX kg
positions (A), and the maximum Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or XXX lbs.
vehicle capacity weight (B) and the Gross Axle Weight 4. The resulting figure equals
in kilograms and pounds. Rating (GAWR) for the front and the available amount of cargo
The vehicle capacity weight rear axle, see Certification and luggage load capacity.
includes the weight of all Label later in this section. For example, if the XXX
occupants, cargo, and all Steps for Determining Correct amount equals 1400 lbs
nonfactoryinstalled options. Load Limit and there will be five 150 lb
The Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement passengers in your vehicle,
Information label also lists The combined weight the amount of available cargo
the tire size of the original of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
equipment tires (C) and should never exceed XXX kg is 650 lbs (1400 750
the recommended cold or XXX lbs on your vehicle's (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
tire inflation pressures (D). placard.
For more information on
tires and inflation, see 2. Determine the combined
Tires on page 1042 and weight of the driver and
Tire Pressure on page 1049. passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.

5. Determine the combined

weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how Example 1 Example 2
this reduces the available A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity
cargo and luggage load Weight for Example 1 = 453 kg Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg
capacity for your vehicle. (1,000 lbs) (1,000 lbs)
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
see Trailer Towing on page 945 68 kg (150 lbs) 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) 5 = 340 kg
for important information on (300 lbs) (750 lbs)
towing a trailer, towing safety C. Available Occupant and Cargo C. Available Cargo
rules, and trailering tips. Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs) Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs)

vehicle's maximum vehicle The label shows the gross

capacity weight and seating weight capacity of your vehicle,
positions. The combined called the Gross Vehicle Weight
weight of the driver, passengers, Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
and cargo should never exceed includes the weight of the
your vehicle's maximum vehicle vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
capacity weight. and cargo.
Certification Label Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
Example 3
If there is a heavy load, it should
A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity be spread out.
Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
91 kg (200 lbs) 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs)
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and A vehicle-specific Certification
Loading Information label for label is found on the rear edge
specific information about your of the driver door.

If things like suitcases, tools,

{ WARNING packages, or anything else WARNING (Continued)
Do not load the vehicle are put inside the vehicle, . Never stack heavier
any heavier than the Gross they will go as fast as the things, like suitcases,
Vehicle Weight Rating vehicle goes. If you have to inside the vehicle so that
(GVWR), or either the stop or turn quickly, or if there some of them are above
maximum front or rear Gross is a crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to { WARNING . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
break and change the way the Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
vehicle handles. This could strike and injure people in a
cause loss of control and a . Secure loose items in the
sudden stop or turn, or in a vehicle.
crash. Overloading can also crash.
shorten the life of the vehicle. . Do not leave a seat folded
. Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
area of the vehicle. In the
Notice : Overloading the
cargo area, put them as
vehicle may cause damage.
far forward as possible.
Repairs would not be covered
Try to spread the weight
by the vehicle warranty.
evenly.
Do not overload the vehicle.
(Continued)


. Do not tow a trailer during To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
Starting and break-in. See Trailer must be in ON/RUN and the brake
Operating Towing on page 945 for pedal must be applied.
the trailer towing capabilities
of your vehicle and more Notice: Using a tool to force the
New Vehicle Break-In information. key to turn in the ignition could
Notice: The vehicle does not cause damage to the switch or
Following breakin, engine break the key. Use the correct
need an elaborate break-in. But it
speed and load can be gradually key, make sure it is all the way in,
will perform better in the long run
increased. and turn it only with your hand.
if you follow these guidelines:
If the key cannot be turned by
. Do not drive at any one Ignition Positions hand, see your dealer.
constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 805 km A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
(500 miles). Do not make LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
full-throttle starts. Avoid stopped, turn the ignition switch to
downshifting to brake or LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
slow the vehicle. Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
. Avoid making hard stops for Accessory Power (RAP) on
the first 322 km (200 miles) page 921
or so. During this time the
new brake linings are not This position locks the ignition.
yet broken in. Hard stops It also locks the transmission.
with new linings can mean This is the only position in which
premature wear and earlier the ignition key can be inserted
replacement. Follow this or removed.
The ignition switch has four different
breaking-in guideline every
positions.
time you get new brake
linings.

Do not turn the engine off when the The steering can bind with the If you leave the key in the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a wheels turned off center. If this ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
loss of power assist in the brake happens, move the steering wheel position with the engine off, the
and steering systems and disable from left to right while turning the battery could be drained. You may
the airbags. key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this not be able to start the vehicle if
In an emergency: doesn't work, then the vehicle the battery is allowed to drain for
needs service. an extended period of time.
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the D (START): This is the position that
brakes repeatedly. This may position in which you can operate starts the engine. When the engine
deplete power assist, requiring the radio and windshield wipers starts, release the key. The ignition
increased brake pedal force. while the engine is off. To use switch returns to ON/RUN for
ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key driving.
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. clockwise.
This can be done while the A warning chime will sound and
vehicle is moving. After shifting C (ON/RUN): This position can the Driver Information Center (DIC)
to neutral, firmly apply the be used to operate the electrical will display DRIVER DOOR OPEN
brakes and steer the vehicle accessories and to display some when the driver door is opened, the
to a safe location. instrument panel cluster warning ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
and indicator lights. The switch LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the
3. Come to a complete stop, shift stays in this position when the ignition. See Door Ajar Messages
to P (Park), and turn the ignition engine is running. on page 531 for more information.
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must be in P (Park)
to turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 929

Starting the Engine The vehicle has a When the Low Fuel warning
Computer-Controlled lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or Cranking System. This feature LOW message is displayed in
N (Neutral). The engine will not start assists in starting the engine the Driver Information Center
in any other position. To restart the and protects components. (DIC), the ComputerControlled
engine when the vehicle is already If the ignition key is turned Cranking System is disabled
moving, use N (Neutral) only. to the START position, and to prevent possible vehicle
Notice: Do not try to shift to then released when the engine component damage. When
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. begins cranking, the engine this happens, hold the ignition
If you do, you could damage the will continue cranking for a switch in the START position
transmission. Shift to P (Park) few seconds or until the vehicle to continue engine cranking.
only when the vehicle is stopped. starts. If the engine does Notice: Cranking the engine for
not start and the key is held long periods of time, by returning
Starting Procedure in START, cranking will be the key to the START position
1. With your foot off the accelerator stopped after 15 seconds to immediately after cranking has
pedal, turn the ignition to prevent cranking motor damage. ended, can overheat and damage
START. When the engine To prevent gear damage, this the cranking motor, and drain the
starts, let go of the key. system also prevents cranking battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
The idle speed will slow if the engine is already running. between each try, to let the
down as the engine warms. Engine cranking can be stopped cranking motor cool down.
Do not race the engine by turning the ignition switch
immediately after starting to the ACC/ACCESSORY or
it. Operate the engine and LOCK/OFF position.
transmission gently to allow
the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.

2. If the engine does not start after Notice: The engine is designed To Use the Engine Heater
510 seconds, especially in very to work with the electronics in
1. Turn off the engine.
cold weather (below 18C or the vehicle. If you add electrical
0F), it could be flooded with too parts or accessories, you could 2. Open the hood and unwrap
much gasoline. Try pushing the change the way the engine the electrical cord. The cord is
accelerator pedal all the way to operates. Before adding electrical attached to the underside of the
the floor and holding it there as equipment, check with your diagonal brace, which is located
you hold the key in START for dealer. If you do not, the engine above the engine air cleaner/
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. might not perform properly. Any filter assembly.
Wait at least 15 seconds resulting damage would not be 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
between each try, to allow the covered by the vehicle warranty. 110-volt AC outlet.
cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go Engine Heater { WARNING
of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then The engine coolant heater can
provide easier starting and Plugging the cord into an
stops again, repeat these steps.
better fuel economy during engine ungrounded outlet could cause
This clears the extra gasoline
from the engine. Do not race warmup in cold weather conditions an electrical shock. Also, the
the engine immediately after at or below 18C (0F). Vehicles wrong kind of extension cord
starting it. Operate the engine with an engine coolant heater could overheat and cause a fire.
and transmission gently until should be plugged in at least You could be seriously injured.
the oil warms up and lubricates four hours before starting. Plug the cord into a properly
all moving parts. grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach,
use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be The power windows will continue to Steering Column Shift Lever
sure to unplug and store the work for up to 10 minutes or until
If the vehicle has a steering column
cord as it was before to keep it any door is opened.
shift lever, use this procedure to
away from moving engine parts,
shift the vehicle into P (Park):
and prevent damage. Shifting Into Park
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on { WARNING 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
several factors. Ask a dealer in the by pulling the shift lever toward
area where you will be parking the It can be dangerous to get out of you and moving it up as far as it
vehicle for the best advice on this. the vehicle if the shift lever is not will go.
fully in P (Park) with the parking 3. With your foot still holding
Retained Accessory brake firmly set. The vehicle can the brake pedal down, set the
Power (RAP) roll. If you have left the engine parking brake. See Parking
running, the vehicle can move Brake on page 929 for more
These vehicle accessories can be suddenly. You or others could be information.
used for up to 10 minutes after the injured. To be sure the vehicle will
engine turned off: 4. Turn the ignition key to
not move, even when you are on
LOCK/OFF.
. Audio System fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a 5. Remove the key and take it with
. Power Windows you. If you can leave the vehicle
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
The radio will work when the key is and Towing Tips on page 942. with the ignition key in your
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF the radio
will continue to work 10 minutes
or until the driver door is opened.

Console Shift Lever Leaving the Vehicle With the Torque Lock
If the vehicle is equipped with Engine Running Torque lock is when the weight
a console shift lever, use this of the vehicle puts too much
procedure to shift the vehicle { WARNING force on the parking pawl in the
into P (Park): transmission. This happens when
It can be dangerous to leave the parking on a hill and shifting the
1. Hold the brake pedal down. vehicle with the engine running. transmission into P (Park) is not
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) The vehicle could move suddenly done properly and then it is difficult
by pushing the lever all the way if the shift lever is not fully in to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
toward the front of the vehicle. P (Park) with the parking brake torque lock, set the parking brake
3. While keeping the brake pedal firmly set. And, if you leave the and then shift into P (Park). To find
applied, set the parking brake. vehicle with the engine running, out how, see Shifting Into Park in
See Parking Brake on page 929 it could overheat and even this section.
for more information. catch fire. You or others could If torque lock does occur, your
be injured. Do not leave the vehicle may need to be pushed
4. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF. vehicle with the engine running. uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
5. Remove the key and take it with can shift out of P (Park).
you. If you can leave the vehicle If you have to leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your with the engine running, be sure
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). your vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. See Parking Brake on

Shifting Out of Park Console Shift Column Shift

If the console shift lever cannot be If the column shift lever cannot be
Automatic Transmission moved out of P (Park): moved out of P (Park):
Shift Lock
1. Apply and maintain the regular 1. Apply and maintain the regular
The vehicle has an electronic shift brakes. brakes.
lock release system. The shift lock
release is designed to: 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN 2. Turn the ignition key to the
position. See Ignition Positions ON/RUN position. See Ignition
. Prevent ignition key removal on page 917 for more Positions on page 917 for more
unless the shift lever is in information. information.
P (Park).
3. Let up on the shift lever and 3. Shift out of the P (Park) position
. Prevent movement of the shift make sure the shift lever is to the N (Neutral) position.
lever out of P (Park), unless the pushed all the way into P (Park).
ignition is in ON/RUN and the 4. Move the vehicle to a safe
regular brake pedal is applied. 4. Press the shift lever button. location.
The shift lock is always functional 5. Then, move the shift into the If you still cannot move the shift
except in the case of a an desired gear. lever from P (Park), consult your
uncharged or low voltage If you still cannot move the shift dealer or a professional towing
(less than 9 volt) battery. lever from P (Park), consult your service.
If the vehicle has an uncharged dealer or a professional towing
battery or a battery with low voltage, service.
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 1075.

Parking Over Things Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

That Burn
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains carbon
in the vehicle body from
damage or after market
Things that can burn could touch monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)

Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out
Transmission
It is better not to park with the The automatic transmission has a
engine running. But if you ever have of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not shift lever on the steering column or
to, here are some things to know. on the console between the seats.
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
{ WARNING roll. Do not leave the vehicle
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed when the engine is running
area with poor ventilation is unless you have to. If you have
dangerous. Engine exhaust may left the engine running, the
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust vehicle can move suddenly.
contains carbon monoxide (CO) You or others could be injured.
which cannot be seen or smelled. To be sure the vehicle will not There is a display, located on the
It can cause unconsciousness move, even when you are on instrument panel cluster, that will
and even death. Never run the fairly level ground, always set indicate the gear the vehicle is in.
engine in an enclosed area the parking brake and move the Maximum engine speed is limited
that has no fresh air ventilation. shift lever to P (Park). on automatic transmission vehicles
For more information, see Engine while in P (Park) or N (Neutral) to
Exhaust on page 924. Follow the proper steps to be protect driveline components from
sure the vehicle will not move. improper operation.
See Shifting Into Park on
page 921.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 942.

There are several different positions Make sure the shift lever is fully To rock the vehicle back and forth to
for the shift lever. in P (Park) before starting the get out of snow, ice, or sand without
P (Park): This position locks the engine. The vehicle has an damaging the transmission, see If
front wheels. It is the best position automatic transmission shift lock the Vehicle is Stuck on page 911.
to use when the engine is started control system. You must fully apply N (Neutral): In this position, the
because the vehicle cannot move the brakes first, then press the shift engine does not connect with the
easily. lever button before you can shift wheels. To restart the engine when
from P (Park) while the ignition is in the vehicle is already moving,
ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
{ WARNING P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
lever and push the shift lever all the being towed.
It can be dangerous to get out of
way into P (Park) as you maintain
the vehicle if the shift lever is not brake application. Then press the
fully in P (Park) with the parking shift lever button and move the shift { WARNING
brake firmly set. The vehicle can lever into another gear. See Shifting
roll. If you have left the engine Shifting into a drive gear while the
Out of Park on page 923.
running, the vehicle can move engine is running at high speed is
suddenly. You or others could be R (Reverse): Use this gear to dangerous. Unless your foot is
back up. firmly on the brake pedal, the
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) vehicle could move very rapidly.
fairly level ground, use the steps while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and hit
that follow. If you are pulling a forward could damage the people or objects. Do not shift
trailer, see Driving Characteristics transmission. The repairs would into a drive gear while the engine
and Towing Tips on page 942. not be covered by the vehicle is running at high speed.
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) Notice: Driving the vehicle if you Notice: Driving in 2 (Second) for
or N (Neutral) with the engine notice that it is moving slowly more than 25 miles (40 km) or at
running at high speed may or not shifting gears as you speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
damage the transmission. increase speed may damage the may damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered transmission. Have the vehicle Also, shifting into 2 (Second) at
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure serviced right away. You can speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h)
the engine is not running at high drive in 2 (Second) when you are can cause damage. Drive in
speed when shifting the vehicle. driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) 3 (Third) or D (Drive) instead
D (Drive) : This position is for and D (Drive) for higher speeds of 2 (Second).
normal driving. It provides the best until then. 1 (First): This position reduces
fuel economy. If you need more 3 (Third): This position is also vehicle speed even more than
power for passing, and you are: used for normal driving. However, 2 (Second) without using the brakes.
. Going less than 55 km/h it reduces vehicle speed more than You can use it on very steep hills,
(35 mph), push the accelerator D (Drive) without using the brakes. or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
pedal about halfway down. You might choose 3 (Third) instead lever is in 1 (First) while the vehicle
of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, is moving forward, the transmission
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or winding roads, when towing a trailer, will not shift into first gear until the
more, push the accelerator pedal so there is less shifting between vehicle is going slowly enough.
all the way down. gears and when going down a Notice: Spinning the tires
The transmission will shift down steep hill. or holding the vehicle in one
to the next gear and the vehicle 2 (Second): This position reduces place on a hill using only the
will have more power. vehicle speed even more than accelerator pedal may damage
Downshifting the transmission in 3 (Third) without using the brakes. the transmission. The repair will
slippery road conditions could result You can use 2 (Second) on hills. not be covered by the vehicle
in skidding, see Skidding under It can help control vehicle speed warranty. If you are stuck, do not
Loss of Control on page 96. as you go down steep mountain spin the tires. When stopping on
roads. You would also want to a hill, use the brakes to hold the
use the brakes off and on. vehicle in place.

Brakes If driving safely on a wet road close to the vehicle in front of you,
and it becomes necessary to there will not be enough time to
slam on the brakes and continue apply the brakes if that vehicle
Antilock Brake braking to avoid a sudden obstacle, suddenly slows or stops. Always
System (ABS) a computer senses that the wheels leave enough room up ahead to
are slowing down. If one of the stop, even with ABS.
This vehicle has the Antilock
wheels is about to stop rolling,
Brake System (ABS), an advanced Using ABS
the computer will separately
electronic braking system that helps
work the brakes at each wheel. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal down firmly and let
When the engine is started and the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS pump or motor operating and feel
than any driver could. This can help
checks itself. A momentary motor or the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while normal.
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the Braking in Emergencies
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates ABS allows the driver to steer and
on wheel speed and controls brake at the same time. In many
braking pressure accordingly. emergencies, steering can help
Remember: ABS does not change more than even the very best
the time needed to get a foot up to braking.
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 521.

Parking Brake To release the parking brake, hold Ride Control Systems
the brake pedal down and push
the parking brake pedal. When you
lift your foot off the parking brake Traction Control
pedal, the pedal will follow it to the System (TCS)
released position.
The vehicle may have a
A warning chime will sound and a Traction Control System (TCS)
brake warning light located on the that limits wheel spin. This is
instrument panel cluster will come especially useful in slippery road
on, if the parking brake is set, the conditions. The system operates
ignition is on, and the vehicle speed only if it senses that one or both
is greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). of the front wheels are spinning
Notice: Driving with the parking or beginning to lose traction. When
brake on can overheat the brake this happens, the system reduces
system and cause premature engine power and may also upshift
The parking brake is located to the
left of the brake pedal, near the wear or damage to brake system the transmission and apply the front
parts. Make sure that the parking brakes to limit wheel spin.
driver door.
brake is fully released and the
To set the parking brake, hold the
brake warning light is off before
brake pedal down, then push down
driving.
the parking brake pedal.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on any hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 942.
This light will flash when the TCS is
limiting wheel spin.

The system may be heard or felt

while it is working, but this is
normal.
If cruise control is being used when
TCS begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically
disengage. Cruise control may be When the system is on, this warning To turn the system on or off, press
reengaged when road conditions light comes on and stays on if there the Traction Control button located
allow. See Cruise Control on is a problem. on the instrument panel.
page 932. A SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL When the system is turned off, the
The TCS operates in all message also appears on the DIC. traction control warning light comes
transmission shift lever positions. When this warning light is on, the on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF
But the system can upshift the system will not limit wheel spin. appears on the DIC. If the traction
transmission only as high as Adjust your driving accordingly. control system is limiting wheel spin
the shift lever position chosen, See Ride Control System Messages when the button is pressed to turn
so use the lower gears only on page 535 for more information. the system off, the warning light
when necessary. See Automatic To limit wheel spin, especially comes on and the system will turn
Transmission on page 925. in slippery road conditions, TCS off right away.
should always be left on. But the Press the Traction Control button
system can be turned off if needed. again to turn the system back on.
Turn the system off if the vehicle The Traction Control warning light
gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow should go off.
and rocking the vehicle is required. Adding nondealer accessories can
See If the Vehicle is Stuck on affect the vehicle's performance.
page 911 for more information. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 103 for more information.

Electronic Stability For more information, see Ride The Electronic Stability
Control System Messages on Control (ESC) system is
Control (ESC) page 535. automatically enabled whenever
Your vehicle may have an you start your vehicle. To assist
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) the driver with vehicle directional
system which combines antilock control, especially in slippery road
brake, traction, and stability control conditions, you should always leave
systems and helps the driver the system on. But, you can turn
maintain directional control of the ESC off if you ever need to.
vehicle in most driving conditions. If the vehicle is in cruise control
When you first start your vehicle This light will flash on the instrument when the system begins to assist
and begin to drive away, the system panel cluster when the ESC system the driver maintain directional
performs several diagnostic checks is both on and activated. control of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS
to ensure there are no problems. You may also feel or hear the light will flash and the cruise control
You may hear or feel the system system working; this is normal. will automatically disengage. When
working. This is normal and does road conditions allow you to use
not mean there is a problem with When the light is on solid and the cruise again, you may re-engage
your vehicle. The system should SERVICE STABILITRAK message the cruise control. See Cruise
initialize before the vehicle reaches is displayed, the system will not Control on page 932.
32 km/h (20 mph). assist the driver in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle.
If the system fails to turn on or Adjust your driving accordingly.
activate, the ESC/TCS light will See Ride Control System
be on solid, and the SERVICE Messages on page 535.
STABILITRAK message will be
displayed.

and you want to rock your vehicle Cruise Control

to attempt to free it. It may also be
necessary to turn off the system With cruise control, you can
when driving in extreme off-road maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
conditions where high wheel spin is (25 mph) or more without keeping
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
The ESC/TCS button is located on on page 911. control does not work at speeds
the instrument panel. below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
ESC may also turn off automatically
if it determines that a problem exists
The traction control system can be
turned off or back on by pressing with the system. The SERVICE { WARNING
the ESC/TCS button. To disable STABILITRAK message and the
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to Cruise control can be dangerous
both traction control and ESC, where you cannot drive safely at
press and hold the button briefly. warn the driver that ESC is disabled
and requires service. If the problem a steady speed. So, do not use
When the ESC system is turned does not clear after restarting the cruise control on winding
off, the TRACTION CONTROL OFF the vehicle, you should see your roads or in heavy traffic.
message will appear, and the dealer for service. See Ride Control Cruise control can be dangerous
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to System Messages on page 535
warn the driver that both traction on slippery roads. On such roads,
for more information. fast changes in tire traction can
control and ESC are disabled.
Adding nondealer accessories can cause excessive wheel slip, and
It is recommended to leave the affect your vehicle's performance. you could lose control. Do not use
system on for normal driving See Accessories and Modifications cruise control on slippery roads.
conditions, but it may be necessary on page 103 for more information.
to turn the system off if your vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,

If your vehicle has the Traction T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise If the cruise button is on when not
Control System (TCS) and the control on and off. The indicator is lit in use, it could get bumped and
cruise control is on, TCS will begin when cruise control is on. go into cruise when not desired.
to limit wheel spin and the cruise Keep the cruise control switch off
control automatically turns off. +RES (Resume/Accelerate): when cruise is not being used.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Press briefly to make the vehicle
on page 929. When road conditions resume to a previously set speed, 1. Press the T button to turn the
allow you to safely use it again, or press and hold to accelerate. cruise system on.
the cruise control can be turned SET : Press to set the speed and 2. Get up to the desired speed.
back on. activate cruise control or make the
3. Press and release the SET
vehicle decelerate.
button located on the steering
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage wheel.
cruise control without erasing the
4. Take your foot off the
set speed from memory.
accelerator.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
The cruise control light on the
If cruise control is set at a desired
instrument panel cluster comes
speed and then the brakes are
on after the cruise control has
applied, the cruise control is
been set to the desired speed.
disengaged without erasing
See Instrument Cluster on
the set speed from memory.
page 511.
Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h
The cruise control buttons are (25 mph) or greater, press the +RES
located on left side of the steering button on the steering wheel. The
wheel. vehicle returns to the previously
selected speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While Using

. To slow down in small amounts, Ending Cruise Control
Cruise Control press the SET button briefly.
Each time this is done, the There are three ways to end cruise
If the cruise control system is vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h control:
already activated: (1 mph) slower. . To disengage cruise control,
. Press and hold the +RES button step lightly on the brake pedal.
Passing Another Vehicle While
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
Using Cruise Control . Press the [ button on the
release it. Use the accelerator pedal to steering wheel.
increase vehicle speed. When . To turn off the cruise control,
. To increase vehicle speed in
you take your foot off the pedal,
small increments, press the press the T button on the
the vehicle will slow down to the
+RES button. Each time this is steering wheel.
cruise speed you set earlier.
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. Using Cruise Control on Hills Erasing Speed Memory
How well the cruise control will work The cruise control set speed
Reducing Speed While Using
on hills depends upon the vehicle memory is erased from memory
Cruise Control
speed, load and the steepness by pressing T or if the ignition
If the cruise control system is is turned off.
of the hills. When going up steep
already activated:
hills, you might have to step on
. Press and hold the SET button the accelerator pedal to maintain
on the steering wheel until the your speed. When going downhill,
lower speed desired is reached, you might have to brake or shift to
then release it. a lower gear to keep your speed
down. If the brakes are applied
the cruise control will turn off.

Fuel Recommended Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline
is an important part of the proper with a posted octane rating of 87 or
maintenance of this vehicle. higher. If the octane rating is less
To help keep the engine clean than 87, an audible knocking noise,
and maintain optimum vehicle commonly referred to as spark
performance, we recommend knock, might be heard when driving.
the use of gasoline advertised as If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. at 87 octane or higher as soon
as possible. If heavy knocking is
Look for the TOP TIER label on heard when using gasoline rated
the fuel pump to ensure gasoline at 87 octane or higher, the engine
meets enhanced detergency Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge needs service.
standards developed by auto and a yellow fuel cap can use either
companies. A list of marketers unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
providing TOP TIER Detergent containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
Gasoline can be found at See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
www.toptiergas.com. page 938. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 935.

Gasoline Specifications California Fuel Fuels in Foreign

(U.S. and Canada Only) Requirements Countries
At a minimum, gasoline If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any
should meet ASTM specification California Emissions Standards, other fuel not recommended in the
D 4814 in the United States it is designed to operate on fuels previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
or CAN/CGSB3.5 or 3.511 in that meet California specifications. caused by use of improper fuel
Canada. Some gasolines contain See the underhood emission control would not be covered by the vehicle
an octane-enhancing additive label. If this fuel is not available in warranty.
called methylcyclopentadienyl states adopting California Emissions To check the fuel availability, ask
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Standards, the vehicle will operate an auto club, or contact a major oil
We recommend against the use satisfactorily on fuels meeting company that does business in the
of gasolines containing MMT. federal specifications, but emission country where you will be driving.
See Fuel Additives on page 937 control system performance might
for additional information. be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smogcheck test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 517. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.

Fuel Additives For customers who do not use Notice: This vehicle was not
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline designed for fuel that contains
To provide cleaner air, all regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel methanol. Do not use fuel
gasolines in the United States are System Treatment PLUS, added containing methanol. It can
now required to contain additives to the fuel tank at every engine oil corrode metal parts in the fuel
that help prevent engine and fuel change, can help clean deposits system and also damage plastic
system deposits from forming, from fuel injectors and intake and rubber parts. That damage
allowing the emission control valves. GM Fuel System Treatment would not be covered under the
system to work properly. In most PLUS is the only gasoline additive vehicle warranty.
cases, nothing should have to be recommended by General Motors.
added to the fuel. However, some Some gasolines that are
It is available at your dealer. not reformulated for low
gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an
U.S. Environmental Protection such as ethers and ethanol, octane-enhancing additive
Agency regulations. To help keep and reformulated gasolines called methylcyclopentadienyl
fuel injectors and intake valves might be available in your area. manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
clean and avoid problems due We recommend that you use these ask the attendant where you buy
to dirty injectors or valves, look gasolines, if they comply with the gasoline whether the fuel contains
for gasoline that is advertised as specifications described earlier. MMT. We recommend against
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and the use of such gasolines. Fuels
Look for the TOP TIER label on other fuels containing more than containing MMT can reduce
the fuel pump to ensure gasoline 10% ethanol must not be used in spark plug life and affect emission
meets enhanced detergency vehicles that were not designed control system performance. The
standards developed by the auto for those fuels. malfunction indicator lamp might
companies. A list of marketers turn on. If this occurs, return to
providing TOP TIER Detergent your dealer for service.
Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) Many service stations will not have To ensure quick starts in the
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump wintertime, the E85 fuel must
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge available. The U.S. Department be formulated properly for your
and a yellow fuel cap can use either of Energy has an alternative fuels climate according to ASTM
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ specification D 5798. If you have
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). locator/stations/) that can help you trouble starting on E85, it could be
For all other vehicles, use only the find E85 fuel. Those stations that because the E85 fuel is not properly
unleaded gasoline described under do have E85 should have a label formulated for your climate. If this
Recommended Fuel on page 935. indicating ethanol content. Do not happens, switching to gasoline or
We encourage the use of E85 in use the fuel if the ethanol content adding gasoline to the fuel tank can
vehicles that are designed to use it. is greater than 85%. improve starting. For good starting
The ethanol in E85 is a renewable At a minimum, E85 should meet and heater efficiency below 0C
fuel, meaning it is made from ASTM Specification D 5798. (32F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
renewable sources such as corn By definition, this means that should contain no more than 70%
and other crops. fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol. It is best not to alternate
ethanol content between 70% repeatedly between gasoline and
and 85%. Filling the fuel tank with E85. If you do switch fuels, it is
fuel mixtures that do not meet recommended that you add as
ASTM specifications can affect much fuel as possible do not
driveability and could cause the add less than 11 L (3 gal) when
malfunction indicator lamp to refueling. You should drive the
come on. vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow
the vehicle to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per liter Filling the Tank

(gallon) than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more
often when using E85 than when { WARNING
you are using gasoline. See Filling Fuel vapor burns violently and a
the Tank on page 939.
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
Notice: Some additives are not To help avoid injuries to you and
compatible with E85 fuel and can others, read and follow all the
harm the vehicle's fuel system. instructions on the fuel pump
Do not add anything to E85. island. Turn off the engine when
Damage caused by additives refueling. Do not smoke near
would not be covered by the fuel or when refueling the vehicle.
vehicle warranty. Do not use cellular phones. The tethered fuel cap is located
Notice: This vehicle was not Keep sparks, flames, and behind a hinged fuel door on the
designed for fuel that contains smoking materials away from driver side of the vehicle. If the
methanol. Do not use fuel fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump vehicle has E85 fuel capability,
containing methanol. It can unattended when refueling the the fuel cap will be yellow and state
corrode metal parts in the fuel that E85 or gasoline can be used.
vehicle. This is against the law in
system and also damage plastic See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
some places. Do not re-enter the
and rubber parts. That damage page 938.
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep
would not be covered under the children away from the fuel pump; To remove the fuel cap, turn it
vehicle warranty. never let children pump fuel. slowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tethered When replacing the fuel cap, turn
fuel cap on the hook on the inside of it clockwise until it clicks. Make { WARNING
the fuel door. sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
{ WARNING the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
Fuel can spray out on you allow fuel to evaporate into the by shutting off the pump or by
if you open the fuel cap too atmosphere. See Malfunction notifying the station attendant.
quickly. If you spill fuel and then Indicator Lamp on page 517. Leave the area immediately.
something ignites it, you could The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
be badly burned. This spray can displays on the Driver Information Notice: If a new fuel cap is
happen if the tank is nearly full, Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not needed, be sure to get the right
and is more likely in hot weather. properly installed. See Fuel System type of cap from your dealer.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait Messages on page 534 for more The wrong type of fuel cap might
for any hiss noise to stop. Then information. not fit properly, might cause
unscrew the cap all the way. the malfunction indicator lamp
to light, and could damage the
fuel tank and emissions system.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
top off or overfill the tank and wait on page 517.
a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible.
See Exterior Care on page 1081.

Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container General Towing
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact Information
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the Only use towing equipment that
Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be has been designed for the vehicle.
while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling Contact your dealer or trailering
electricity discharge from the is complete. dealer for assistance with preparing
container can ignite the fuel the vehicle for towing a trailer.
. Do not smoke while
vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel. See the following trailer towing
and the vehicle damaged if this information in this section:
occurs. To help avoid injury to
. Do not use a cellular phone .
while pumping fuel. For information on driving
you and others: while towing a trailer, see
. Dispense fuel only into Driving Characteristics and
approved containers. Towing Tips.
. For maximum vehicle and trailer
. Do not fill a container while
weights, see Trailer Towing.
it is inside a vehicle, in a . For information on equipment
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, to tow a trailer, see Towing
or on any surface other Equipment.
than the ground.
(Continued) For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 1079. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 1079.


. Then, during the first 800 km
Driving Characteristics (500 miles) that a trailer is
Driving with a Trailer
and Towing Tips towed, do not drive over 80 km/h Towing a trailer requires a certain
(50 mph) and do not make starts amount of experience. Get to know
Pulling a Trailer at full throttle. This helps the the rig before setting out for the
Here are some important points: engine and other parts of the open road. Get acquainted with
vehicle wear in at the heavier the feel of handling and braking
. There are many different with the added weight of the trailer.
laws, including speed limit loads.
And always keep in mind that
restrictions, having to do with . Obey speed limit restrictions the vehicle you are driving is now
trailering. Make sure the rig when towing a trailer. Do not longer and not as responsive as
will be legal, not only where drive faster than the maximum the vehicle is by itself.
you live but also where you posted speed for trailers, or no
will be driving. A good source more than 90 km/h (55 mph), to Before starting, check all trailer
for this information can be state save wear on the vehicle's parts. hitch parts and attachments, safety
or provincial police. chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
. Do not tow a trailer when the tires and mirror adjustments. If the
. Do not tow a trailer at all during outside temperature is above trailer has electric brakes, start the
the first 1600 km (1,000 miles) 38C (100F). vehicle and trailer moving and then
the new vehicle is driven. apply the trailer brake controller by
Three important considerations
The engine, transmission hand to be sure the brakes are
have to do with weight:
or other parts could be working. This checks the electrical
damaged. The repairs . the weight of the trailer,
connection at the same time.
would not be covered by . the weight of the trailer tongue
the vehicle's warranty. During the trip, check occasionally
. and the total weight on the to be sure that the load is secure,
vehicle's tires. and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.

Following Distance Making Turns Turn Signals When Towing a

Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns Trailer
vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the The arrows on the instrument panel
driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with flash whenever signaling a turn or
This can help to avoid situations the vehicle. The vehicle could lane change. Properly hooked up,
that require heavy braking and be damaged. Avoid making very the trailer lamps also flash, telling
sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering. other drivers the vehicle is turning,
When turning with a trailer, make changing lanes or stopping.
Passing
wider turns than normal. Do this When towing a trailer, the arrows on
More passing distance is needed so the trailer will not strike soft the instrument panel flash for turns
when towing a trailer. Because the shoulders, curbs, road signs, even if the bulbs on the trailer are
rig is longer, it is necessary to go trees or other objects. Avoid jerky burned out. For this reason you
much farther beyond the passed or sudden maneuvers. Signal well may think other drivers are seeing
vehicle before returning to the lane. in advance. the signal when they are not. It is
Backing Up important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
Hold the bottom of the steering working.
wheel with one hand. Then,
to move the trailer to the left,
move that hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right,
move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
guide you.

Driving on Grades Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then

apply the parking brake and shift
Notice: Do not tow on steep
continuous grades exceeding { WARNING the transmission into P (Park).
9.6 km (6 miles). Extended, 5. Release the brake pedal.
higher than normal engine Parking the vehicle on a hill
and transmission temperatures with the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill
may result and damage the dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
vehicle. Frequent stops are wrong, the rig could start to move. while you:
very important to allow the People can be injured, and both . start the engine,
engine and transmission the vehicle and the trailer can be
to cool. damaged. When possible, always . shift into a gear, and
Reduce speed and shift to a park the rig on a flat surface. . release the parking brake.
lower gear before starting down 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
a long or steep downgrade. If the If parking the rig on a hill:
transmission is not shifted down, 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
1. Press the brake pedal, but do clear of the chocks.
the brakes might have to be used
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
so much that they would get hot 4. Stop and have someone pick up
the wheels into the curb if facing
and no longer work well. and store the chocks.
downhill or into traffic if facing
On a long uphill grade, shift down uphill. Maintenance When Trailer
and reduce the vehicle's speed to Towing
2. Have someone place chocks
around 70 km/h (45 mph) to reduce
under the trailer wheels. The vehicle needs service
the possibility of the engine and the
transmission overheating. If the 3. When the wheel chocks are in more often when pulling a trailer.
engine does overheat, see Engine place, release the brake pedal See Scheduled Maintenance on
Overheating on page 1021. until the chocks absorb the load. page 112 for more information.

Things that are especially important Trailer Towing Notice: Pulling a trailer
in trailer operation are automatic improperly can damage the
transmission fluid, engine oil, belts, vehicle and result in costly
cooling system and brake system. { WARNING repairs not covered by the
It is a good idea to inspect these The driver can lose control when vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer
before and during the trip. correctly, follow the advice in
pulling a trailer if the correct
Check periodically to see that all this section and see your dealer
equipment is not used or the
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. for important information about
vehicle is not driven properly. towing a trailer with the vehicle.
For example, if the trailer is too
Engine Cooling When Trailer The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is
heavy, the brakes may not work
Towing equipped with the proper trailer
well or even at all. The driver
The cooling system may temporarily and passengers could be towing equipment. To identify the
overheat during severe operating seriously injured. The vehicle may trailering capacity of the vehicle,
conditions. See Engine Overheating also be damaged; the resulting read the information in Weight
on page 1021. of the Trailer that appears later in
repairs would not be covered by
this section. Trailering is different
Changing a Tire When Trailer the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
than just driving the vehicle by
Towing only if all the steps in this section itself. Trailering means changes
have been followed. Ask your in handling, acceleration, braking,
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while dealer for advice and information
towing a trailer, be sure to secure durability and fuel economy.
about towing a trailer with the Successful, safe trailering takes
the trailer and disconnect it from the vehicle.
vehicle before changing the tire. correct equipment, and it has to
be used properly.

The following information has many Weight of the Trailer Ask your dealer for trailering
time-tested, important trailering tips information or advice, or write us at
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
and safety rules. Many of these are our Customer Assistance Offices.
important for the safety of the driver It should never weigh more than See Customer Assistance Offices
and the passengers. So please read 454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that on page 133 for more information.
this section carefully before pulling a can be too heavy.
trailer. Weight of the Trailer Tongue
It depends on how the rig is used.
Load-pulling components such For example, speed, altitude, road The tongue load (A) of any trailer
as the engine, transmission, grades, outside temperature and is an important weight to measure
axles, wheel assemblies and how much the vehicle is used to because it affects the total gross
tires are forced to work harder pull a trailer are all important. It can weight of the vehicle. The Gross
against the drag of the added depend on any special equipment Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
weight. The engine is required to on the vehicle, and the amount of the curb weight of the vehicle,
operate at relatively higher speeds tongue weight the vehicle can carry. any cargo carried in it, and the
and under greater loads, generating See Weight of the Trailer Tongue people who will be riding in the
extra heat. The trailer also adds later in this section for more vehicle. If there are a lot of options,
considerably to wind resistance, information. equipment, passengers or cargo
increasing the pulling requirements. in the vehicle, it will reduce the
Maximum trailer weight is calculated tongue weight the vehicle can
assuming only the driver is in carry, which will also reduce the
the tow vehicle and it has all the trailer weight the vehicle can tow.
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.

If towing a trailer, the tongue load After loading the trailer, weigh Towing Equipment
must be added to the GVW because the trailer and then the tongue,
the vehicle will be carrying that separately, to see if the weights are Hitches
weight, too. See Vehicle Load Limits proper. If they are not, adjustments It is important to have the correct
on page 912 for more information might be made by moving some hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
about the vehicle's maximum load items around in the trailer. trucks going by and rough roads are
capacity. a few reasons why the right hitch is
Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires needed. Here are some rules to
follow:
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
. The rear bumper on the vehicle
tires. These numbers can be found is not intended for hitches. Do
on the Certification/Tire label. See not attach rental hitches or other
Vehicle Load Limits on page 912. bumper-type hitches to it. Use
Make sure not to go over the GVW only a frame-mounted hitch that
limit for the vehicle, including the does not attach to the bumper.
weight of the trailer tongue. . Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, then be sure to seal the
Using a weight-carrying hitch, holes later when the hitch is
the trailer tongue (A) should weigh removed. If the holes are not
10 to 15 percent of the total loaded sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
trailer weight (B). carbon monoxide (CO) from
the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 924 in the Index for more
information.

Safety Chains Trailer Brakes Conversions and

Always attach chains between Because the vehicle has antilock Add-Ons
the vehicle and the trailer. Cross brakes, do not try to tap into the
the safety chains under the tongue vehicle's hydraulic brake system.
of the trailer to help prevent the If you do, both brake systems will Add-On Electrical
tongue from contacting the road not work well, or at all. Equipment
if it becomes separated from the Does your trailer have its own Notice: Do not add anything
hitch. Instructions about safety brakes? Be sure to read and follow electrical to the vehicle unless
chains may be provided by the the instructions for the trailer brakes you check with your dealer first.
hitch manufacturer or by the so you will be able to install, adjust Some electrical equipment can
trailer manufacturer. Follow the and maintain them properly. damage the vehicle and the
manufacturer's recommendation
damage would not be covered
for attaching safety chains and
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
do not attach them to the bumper.
add-on electrical equipment can
Always leave just enough slack so
keep other components from
the rig can turn. Never allow safety
working as they should.
chains to drag on the ground.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag
system. Before attempting to add
anything electrical to the vehicle,
see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 340 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 340.

Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-15

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21 Bulb Replacement
General Information Overheated Engine Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Protection Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
California Proposition Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Headlamps, Front Turn
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-24 Signal, Sidemarker, and
California Perchlorate Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Accessories and Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-35
Vehicle Checks Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-29 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-36
Automatic Transmission Shift Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Lock Control Function Electrical System
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Ignition Transmission Lock
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Fuses and Circuit
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Park Brake and P (Park)
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine Compartment Fuse
Automatic Transmission Wiper Blade
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-43 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-63 For service and parts needs,
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 visit your dealer. You will receive
Tire Terminology and If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 and supported service people.
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-74 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tire Pressure Monitor these marks:
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Jump Starting
Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Towing
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Recreational Vehicle
When It Is Time for New Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Appearance Care
Different Size Tires and Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Uniform Tire Quality Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and

65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding nondealer accessories or
one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag making modifications to the vehicle
known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, can affect vehicle performance
cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in and safety, including such things
other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, as airbags, braking, stability, ride
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials. and handling, emissions systems,
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. aerodynamics, durability, and
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see electronic systems like antilock
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ brakes, traction control, and
perchlorate. stability control. These accessories
or modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from modifications or
the installation or use of nonGM
certified parts, including control

10-4 Vehicle Care
module or software modifications, Vehicle Checks

is not covered under the terms of WARNING (Continued)
the vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the
affected parts. Service Work proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. Metric and
GM Accessories are designed to English fasteners can be
complement and function with other { WARNING easily confused. If the wrong
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
vehicle could be damaged if you can later break or fall off.
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer try to do service work on a vehicle You could be hurt.
and ask for GM Accessories, you without knowing enough about it.
will know that GM-trained and . Be sure you have sufficient If doing some of your own service
supported service technicians will knowledge, experience, work, use the proper service
perform the work using genuine the proper replacement manual. It tells you much more
GM Accessories. parts, and tools before
Also, see Adding Equipment to attempting any vehicle
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on maintenance task.
page 340. (Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-5
about how to service the vehicle Hood

than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service To open the hood, do the following:
Publications Ordering Information
on page 1313.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 340. 1. Pull the interior hood release
Keep a record with all parts receipts handle with this symbol on it.
and list the mileage and the date It is located to the left of the
of any service work performed. See parking brake pedal. 2. Then go to the front of the
Maintenance Records on page 119. vehicle and release the
secondary hood latch, located
near the center of the hood front,
by pushing the latch to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then pull the hood down and close
it firmly.

10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview

3.5 L V6 Engine Shown, 3.9 L V6 Engine Similar

Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Windshield Washer Fluid H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When Engine Oil
Reservoir. See Adding Washer to Add Engine Oil under
Fluid under Washer Fluid on Engine Oil on page 107. To ensure proper engine
page 1025. performance and long life,
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. careful attention must be paid
B. Battery. See Battery on See Checking Engine Oil to engine oil. Following these
page 1029. under Engine Oil on page 107. simple, but important steps will
C. Underhood Fuse Block. J. Automatic Transmission help protect your investment:
See Engine Compartment Fluid Dipstick (Out of View). . Always use engine oil approved
Fuse Block on page 1038. See Checking the Fluid Level to the proper specification and
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. under Automatic Transmission of the proper viscosity grade.
See Jump Starting on Fluid on page 1012. See Selecting the Right Engine
page 1075. K. Brake Master Cylinder Oil in this section.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. Reservoir. See Brake Fluid . Check the engine oil level
See Checking Coolant under under Brakes on page 1026. regularly and maintain the
Cooling System on page 1016. L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. proper oil level. See Checking
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Engine Oil and When to Add
F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling Engine Oil in this section.
System on page 1016. on page 1015.
. Change the engine oil at the
G. Power Steering Fluid Cap.
appropriate time. See Engine
See Power Steering Fluid on
Oil Life System on page 1011.
page 1024.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See What to Do with
Used Oil in this section.

10-8 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much
oil. Oil levels above or below
It is a good idea to check the
the acceptable operating range
engine oil level at each fuel fill.
shown on the dipstick are harmful
In order to get an accurate
to the engine. If you find that
reading, the vehicle must be
you have an oil level above the
on level ground. The engine oil
operating range, i.e., the engine
dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
has so much oil that the oil level
See Engine Compartment Overview
gets above the cross-hatched
on page 106 for the location of If the oil is below the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
the engine oil dipstick. area at the tip of the dipstick, operating range, the engine
Obtaining an accurate oil level add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended could be damaged. You should
reading is essential: oil and then recheck the level. drain out the excess oil or limit
See Selecting the Right Engine Oil driving of the vehicle and seek a
1. If the engine has been running in this section for an explanation of
recently, turn off the engine and service professional to remove
what kind of oil to use. For engine the excess amount of oil.
allow several minutes for the oil oil crankcase capacity, see
to drain back into the oil pan. Capacities and Specifications on See Engine Compartment Overview
Checking the oil level too soon page 122. on page 106 for the location of the
after engine shutoff will not engine oil fill cap.
provide an accurate oil level
Add enough oil to put the level
reading.
somewhere in the proper operating
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean range. Push the dipstick all the way
it with a paper towel or cloth, back in when through.
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.

Vehicle Care 10-9
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Failure to use the recommended

engine oil or equivalent can
Selecting the right engine oil
result in engine damage not
depends on both the proper oil
covered by the vehicle warranty.
specification and viscosity grade:
If you are unsure whether the
Specification oil is approved to the dexos
specification, ask your service
Use and ask for engine oils with This vehicle was filled at the factory provider.
the dexos certification mark. with dexosapproved engine oil.
Oils meeting the requirements of Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
Notice: Use only engine oil dexos is unavailable: In the event
the vehicle should have the dexos
that is approved to the dexos that dexosapproved engine oil is
certification mark on the container.
specification or an equivalent not available at an oil change or
This certification mark indicates that
engine oil of the appropriate for maintaining proper oil level,
the oil has been approved to the
viscosity grade. Engine you may use substitute engine oil
dexos specification.
oils approved to the dexos displaying the API Starburst symbol
specification will show the and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
dexos symbol on the container.

10-10 Vehicle Care
Use of oils that do not meet the Cold Temperature Operation:

dexos specification, however, may In an area of extreme cold,
result in reduced performance under where the temperature falls
certain circumstances. below 29C (20F), an
SAE 0W-30 oil should be used.
Viscosity Grade An oil of this viscosity grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity will provide easier cold starting
grade for the vehicle. Do not for the engine at extremely low
use other viscosity oils such as temperatures. When selecting an
SAE 10W30, 10W40, or 20W-50. oil of the appropriate viscosity
grade, be sure to always select
an oil that meets the required
specification, dexos. See
Specification earliern in this
section for more information.

Vehicle Care 10-11
Engine Oil Additives/Engine What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System
Oil Flushes Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil
Do not add anything to the oil. elements that can be unhealthy
The recommended oils with the for your skin and could even cause This vehicle has a computer system
dexos specification and displaying cancer. Do not let used oil stay on that indicates when to change the
the dexos certification mark are all your skin for very long. Clean your engine oil and filter. This is based
that is needed for good performance skin and nails with soap and water, on engine revolutions and engine
and engine protection. or a good hand cleaner. Wash or temperature, and not on mileage.
properly dispose of clothing or rags Based on driving conditions, the
Engine oil system flushes are not mileage at which an oil change is
containing used engine oil. See the
recommended and could cause indicated can vary considerably.
manufacturer's warnings about the
engine damage not covered by For the oil life system to work
use and disposal of oil products.
the vehicle warranty. properly, the system must be reset
Used oil can be a threat to the
every time the oil is changed.
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the When the system has calculated
oil from the filter before disposal. that oil life has been diminished,
Never dispose of oil by putting it indicates that an oil change is
it in the trash or pouring it on the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
ground, into sewers, or into streams OIL SOON message comes on.
or bodies of water. Recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects
used oil.

10-12 Vehicle Care
See Engine Oil Messages on How to Reset the Engine Oil Automatic Transmission
page 533. Change the oil as Life System
soon as possible within the next
Fluid
1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the When to Check and Change
that, if driving under the best Automatic Transmission Fluid
conditions, the oil life system system can calculate the next
might indicate that an oil change engine oil change. Always reset A good time to check the automatic
is not necessary for up to a year. the engine oil life to 100% after transmission fluid level is when the
The engine oil and filter must be every oil change. It will not reset engine oil is changed.
changed at least once a year and, itself. To reset the system:
Change the fluid and filter at
at this time, the system must be 1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING the intervals listed in Scheduled
reset. Your dealer has trained on the DIC. Maintenance on page 112, and be
service people who will perform sure to use the transmission fluid
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
this work and reset the system. listed in Recommended Fluids and
button on the DIC for more than
It is also important to check the Lubricants on page 116.
five seconds. The oil life will
oil regularly over the course of
change to 100%.
an oil drain interval and keep
it at the proper level. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
If the system is ever reset
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
accidentally, the oil must be
system has not reset. Repeat the
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
procedure.
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.

Vehicle Care 10-13
How to Check Automatic Wait at least 30 minutes before Checking the Fluid Level
Transmission Fluid checking the transmission fluid Prepare your vehicle as follows:
level if you have been driving:
Because this operation can be a 1. Park the vehicle on a level
little difficult, it may be decided to . When outside temperatures are place. Keep the engine running.
have this done at the dealer service above 32C (90F).
department. 2. With the parking brake applied,
. At high speed for quite a while. place the shift lever in P (Park).
If not taken to the dealer, be sure to . In heavy traffic especially in
follow all the instructions here, or a 3. With your foot on the brake
hot weather. pedal, move the shift lever
false reading on the dipstick could
result.
. While pulling a trailer. through each gear range,
To get the right reading, the fluid pausing for about three seconds
Notice: Too much or too in each range. Then, position
little fluid can damage the should be at normal operating
temperature, which is 82C to 93C the shift lever in P (Park).
transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid (180F to 200F). 4. Let the engine run at idle for
could come out and fall on Get the vehicle warmed up by three to five minutes.
hot engine parts or exhaust driving about 24 km (15 mi) when
system parts, starting a fire. outside temperatures are above
Too little fluid could cause 10C (50F). If it is colder than
the transmission to overheat. 10C (50F), the vehicle may
Be sure to get an accurate have to be driven longer.
reading if checking the
transmission fluid.

10-14 Vehicle Care
Then, without shutting off the 2. Push it back in all the way, wait How to Add Fluid
engine, follow these steps: three seconds, and then pull it
Refer to Recommended Fluids
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it back out again.
and Lubricants on page 116 to
with a clean rag or paper towel. determine what kind of transmission
fluid to use.
If the fluid level is low, add only
enough of the proper fluid to bring
the level into the cross-hatched
area on the dipstick.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, 1. Pull out the dipstick.
The transmission fluid dipstick and read the lower level. 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add
handle is the black loop with The fluid level must be in enough fluid at the dipstick hole
this symbol on it. It is located the cross-hatched area. to bring it to the proper level.
near the rear of the engine 4. If the fluid level is in the It does not take much fluid,
compartment. acceptable range, push the generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt).
See Engine Compartment dipstick back in all the way. Do not overfill.
Overview on page 106 for
more information on location.

Vehicle Care 10-15
Notice: Use of the incorrect When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the engine air
automatic transmission fluid Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter do the following:
may damage the vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by Inspect the air cleaner/filter at
the vehicle warranty. Always use the scheduled maintenance
the automatic transmission fluid intervals and replace it at the first
listed in Recommended Fluids oil change after each (80 000 km
and Lubricants on page 116. (50,000 mi) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 112 for more
3. After adding fluid, recheck the information. If driving in dusty/dirty
fluid level as described under conditions, inspect the filter at each
How to Check Automatic engine oil change.
Transmission Fluid, earlier
in this section. How to Inspect the Engine Air
4. When the correct fluid level is
Cleaner/Filter
obtained, push the dipstick back To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
in all the way. remove the filter from the vehicle 1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top
and lightly shake the filter to release of the engine air cleaner/filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter loose dust and dirt. If the filter housing.
remains covered with dirt, a new
The engine air cleaner/filter is filter is required.
located in the engine compartment
on the driver side of the vehicle.
on page 106 for more information
on location.

10-16 Vehicle Care
Cooling System
{ WARNING
The cooling system allows the
Operating the engine with the air engine to maintain the correct
cleaner/filter off can cause you working temperature.
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
2. Push the filter cover housing Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is

toward the engine. off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
3. Pull out the filter. Always have the air cleaner/filter
4. Inspect or replace the engine air in place when you are driving.
cleaner/filter. 3.5 L V6 Engine Shown,
5. To reinstall the cover, position 3.9 L V6 Engine Similar
the tabs through the hinges on A. Coolant Recovery Tank
the housing.
B. Pressure Cap
6. Push the cover tabs on top of
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
the housing to lock the cover in
(Out of View)
place.

Vehicle Care 10-17
Engine Coolant
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
The cooling system in the vehicle
An electric engine cooling fan Do not run the engine if there is filled with DEX-COOL engine
under the hood can start up is a leak. If you run the engine, it coolant. This coolant is designed to
even when the engine is not could lose all coolant. That could remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
running and can cause injury. cause an engine fire, and you 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
Keep hands, clothing, and tools could be burned. Get any leak occurs first.
away from any underhood fixed before you drive the vehicle. The following explains the cooling
electric fan. system and how to check and add
Notice: Using coolant other than coolant when it is low. If there is a
DEX-COOL can cause premature problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
{ WARNING engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine page 1021.
Heater and radiator hoses, and coolant could require changing
other engine parts, can be very sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, or 24 months, whichever occurs
you can be burned. first. Any repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
(Continued) warranty. Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.

10-18 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors

drinkable water and DEX-COOL and/or additives are used in
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
the vehicle cooling system,
the vehicle could be damaged.
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: Use only the proper mixture of
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down the engine coolant listed in this
can be dangerous. Plain water to 37C (47F), outside manual for the cooling system.
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. See Recommended Fluids and
the proper coolant mixture will. Lubricants on page 116 for
. Gives boiling protection up more information.
The coolant warning system is to 129C (265F), engine
set for the proper coolant mixture. temperature. Never dispose of engine coolant
With plain water or the wrong by putting it in the trash, pouring
mixture, the engine could get
. Protects against rust and it on the ground, or into sewers,
too hot but you would not get the corrosion. streams, or bodies of water.
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts. Have the coolant changed by an
could catch fire and you or authorized service center, familiar
. Helps keep the proper engine with legal requirements regarding
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable used coolant disposal. This will help
Notice: If an improper coolant protect the environment and your
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
mixture is used, the engine could health.
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.

Vehicle Care 10-19
Checking Coolant When the engine is cold, the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a
level should be at or above the specific coolant fill procedure.
The vehicle must be on a level
COLD FILL line on the coolant Failure to follow this procedure
surface when checking the coolant
recovery tank. To check the coolant could cause the engine to
level.
level, look for the COLD FILL line on overheat and be severely
Check to see if coolant is visible the side of the coolant recovery tank damaged.
in the coolant recovery tank. If the that faces the engine. If the level is If coolant is needed, add the proper
coolant inside the coolant recovery not correct, there may be a leak in DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
tank is boiling, do not do anything the cooling system. coolant recovery tank.
else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at How to Add Coolant to the When the coolant level in the
or above the COLD FILL line, add Recovery Tank coolant recovery tank is at the
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable COLD FILL line, start the vehicle.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the { WARNING If the overheat warning continues,
coolant recovery tank, but be sure there is one more thing you can try.
the cooling system is cool before You can be burned if you spill The proper coolant mixture can be
this is done. coolant on hot engine parts. added directly to the cooling system
The coolant recovery tank is Coolant contains ethylene glycol through the coolant fill neck on the
located in the rear of the engine and it will burn if the engine parts engine, but be sure the system is
compartment on the passenger are hot enough. Do not spill cool before doing it.
side of the vehicle. See Engine coolant on a hot engine.
Compartment Overview on
page 106.

10-20 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the

Radiator WARNING (Continued)
They are under pressure, and if

{ WARNING you turn the surge tank pressure
An electric engine cooling fan cap even a little they can
under the hood can start up come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling 1. Remove the pressure cap when
even when the engine is not the cooling system, including
running and can cause injury. system, including the surge tank
the pressure cap and upper
Keep hands, clothing, and tools pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
radiator hose is no longer hot.
away from any underhood cooling system and surge tank
Turn the pressure cap slowly
electric fan. pressure cap to cool if you ever counterclockwise.
have to turn the pressure cap.
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means that there is
If coolant is needed, add the proper
{ WARNING mixture directly to the radiator, but
still some pressure left.
be sure the cooling system is cool 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
Steam and scalding liquids and remove it.
from a hot cooling system can before this is done.
blow out and burn you badly.
(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-21
3. Fill the cooling system with 5. Install the coolant recovery Engine Overheating
the proper DEX-COOL coolant tank cap and the pressure cap.
mixture, up to the base of the After a day or two of driving, The vehicle has several indicators
filler neck. See What to use when the engine is cold, check to warn of engine overheating.
for more information about the the coolant level in the recovery There is a coolant temperature
proper coolant mixture. Rinse or tank. If it is low, refill it to the gauge and a warning light on
wipe any spilled coolant from the COLD FILL line. the instrument panel that indicate
engine and the compartment. If the coolant in the recovery tank an overheated engine condition.
is constantly low, have a dealer See Engine Coolant Temperature
service department inspect the Gauge on page 513 and Engine
vehicle for leaks. Coolant Temperature Warning Light
on page 523.
Notice: If the pressure cap is
not tightly installed, coolant loss In addition, there is an ENGINE
and possible engine damage may OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and an ENGINE OVERHEATED
and tightly secured. STOP ENGINE message displayed
on the vehicle Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling
System Messages on page 532
for more information.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery

tank to the COLD FILL line.

10-22 Vehicle Care
If it is decided not to lift the hood Notice: Engine damage from If Steam is Coming from the
when this warning appears, but running the engine without Engine Compartment
instead get service help right away, coolant is not covered by the
see Roadside Assistance Program warranty.
on page 136.
{ WARNING
Notice: If the engine catches fire
If it is decided to lift the hood, make while driving with no coolant, the Steam from an overheated engine
sure the vehicle is parked on a level vehicle can be badly damaged. can burn you badly, even if you
surface. The costly repairs would not just open the hood. Stay away
Then check to see if the engine be covered by the vehicle from the engine if you see or hear
cooling fans are running. If the warranty. See Overheated Engine steam coming from it. Turn it off
engine is overheating, both fans Protection Operating Mode on and get everyone away from the
should be running. If they are not, page 1024 for information on vehicle until it cools down. Wait
do not continue to run the engine driving to a safe place in an until there is no sign of steam
and have the vehicle serviced. emergency. or coolant before you open
the hood.
(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-23
If No Steam is Coming from If the overheat warning is displayed

WARNING (Continued) the Engine Compartment with no sign of steam:
If you keep driving when the If an engine overheat warning is 1. Turn the air off.
vehicles engine is overheated, displayed but no steam can be seen 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
the liquids in it can catch fire. or heard, the problem may not be temperature and to the highest
You or others could be badly too serious. Sometimes the engine fan speed. Open the windows as
burned. Stop the engine if it can get a little too hot when the necessary.
overheats, and get out of the vehicle:
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
vehicle until the engine is cool. . Climbs a long hill on a hot day idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
See Overheated Engine . Stops after high-speed driving If it is safe to do so, pull off
Protection Operating Mode on the road, shift to P (Park)
. Idles for long periods in traffic or N (Neutral) and let the
page 1024 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
. Tows a trailer engine idle.
emergency.

10-24 Vehicle Care
If the temperature overheat gauge Overheated Engine Notice: After driving in the
is no longer in the overheat zone overheated engine protection
or an overheat warning no longer
Protection operating mode, to avoid engine
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Operating Mode damage, allow the engine to cool
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly This emergency operating before attempting any repair.
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe mode allows the vehicle to The engine oil will be severely
vehicle distance from the vehicle in be driven to a safe place in degraded. Repair the cause of
front. If the warning does not come an emergency situation. If an coolant loss, change the oil
back on, continue to drive normally. overheated engine condition and reset the oil life system.
If the warning continues, pull exists, an overheat protection See Engine Oil on page 107.
over, stop, and park the vehicle mode which alternates firing
right away. groups of cylinders helps prevent Power Steering Fluid
engine damage. In this mode,
If there is no sign of steam,
a significant loss in power and
idle the engine for three minutes
engine performance will be noticed.
while parked. If the warning is still
The coolant temperature gauge
displayed, turn off the engine until it
will indicate an overheat condition
cools down. Also, see "Overheated
exists. Driving extended km (mi)
Engine Protection Operating Mode"
and/or towing a trailer in the
in this section.
overheat protection mode should The power steering fluid
be avoided. reservoir is located toward the
rear of the engine compartment on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
on page 106 for reservoir location.

Vehicle Care 10-25
When to Check Power Steering 4. Replace the cap and completely Washer Fluid
Fluid tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless at the fluid level on the dipstick. When the vehicle needs windshield
there is a leak suspected in the washer fluid, be sure to read the
The fluid level should
system or an unusual noise is be somewhere within the manufacturer's instructions before
heard. A fluid loss in this system use. If operating the vehicle in an
crosshatched area on the
could indicate a problem. Have the area where the temperature may
dipstick. If the fluid is at the
system inspected and repaired. ADD mark, fluid should be fall below freezing, use a fluid that
added. has sufficient protection against
How to Check Power Steering freezing.
Fluid What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, To determine what kind of fluid to
do the following: A WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
use, see Recommended Fluids and
FLUID message will be displayed
1. Turn the key off and let the Lubricants on page 116. Always
use the proper fluid. on the Driver Information Center
engine compartment cool down. (DIC) when windshield washer fluid
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid needs to be added to the vehicle.
reservoir clean. may damage the vehicle and the See Washer Fluid Messages on
damages may not be covered by page 538 for more information.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the the vehicle's warranty. Always
dipstick with a clean rag. use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 116.

10-26 Vehicle Care

. Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Brakes
Water can cause the solution This vehicle has disc brakes.
to freeze and damage the Disc brake pads have built-in wear
washer fluid tank and other indicators that make a high-pitched
parts of the washer system. warning sound when the brake pads
Also, water does not clean as are worn and new pads are needed.
Open the cap with the washer well as washer fluid. The sound can come and go or be
symbol on it. Add washer fluid heard all the time the vehicle is
until the tank is full. . Fill the washer fluid tank
moving, except when applying
only three-quarters full
See Engine Compartment Overview the brake pedal firmly.
when it is very cold. This
on page 106 for more information allows for fluid expansion
on location. if freezing occurs, which { WARNING
Notice: could damage the tank if
it is completely full. The brake wear warning sound
. When using concentrated means that soon the brakes will
washer fluid, follow the . Do not use engine coolant not work well. That could lead to
manufacturer's instructions (antifreeze) in the windshield a crash. When the brake wear
for adding water. washer. It can damage the warning sound is heard, have
windshield washer system
the vehicle serviced.
and paint.
Notice: Continuing to drive with

worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.

Vehicle Care 10-27
Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid

can cause a brake squeal when
Every time the brakes are applied,
the brakes are first applied or
with or without the vehicle moving,
lightly applied. This does not mean
the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts Replacing Brake System Parts
are necessary to help prevent The braking system on a vehicle is
brake pulsation. When tires are The brake master cylinder reservoir
complex. Its many parts have to be
rotated, inspect brake pads for is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
of top quality and work well together
wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts indicated on the reservoir cap. See
if the vehicle is to have really good
in the proper sequence to torque Engine Compartment Overview on
braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and page 106 for the location of the
and tested with top-quality brake
Specifications on page 122. reservoir.
parts. When parts of the braking
Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get There are only two reasons why
replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. the brake fluid level in the reservoir
If this is not done, the brakes might might go down:
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example, . The brake fluid level goes down
See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are because of normal brake lining
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change wear. When new linings are
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and installed, the fluid level goes
pedal travel. This could be a rear brakes for the worse. The back up.
sign that brake service might braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
. A fluid leak in the brake
be required. hydraulic system can also cause
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed. a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.

10-28 Vehicle Care
Do not top off the brake fluid. What to Add Notice:

Adding fluid does not correct a Use only new DOT 3 brake . Using the wrong fluid
leak. If fluid is added when the fluid from a sealed container. can badly damage brake
linings are worn, there will be too See Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts.
much fluid when new brake linings Lubricants on page 116. For example, just a few
are installed. Add or remove brake drops of mineral-based oil,
fluid, as necessary, only when work Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area such as engine oil, in the
is done on the brake hydraulic brake hydraulic system can
system. around the cap before removing it.
This helps keep dirt from entering damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
{ WARNING the reservoir.
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
If too much brake fluid is added, { WARNING the wrong kind of fluid.
it can spill on the engine and
burn, if the engine is hot enough. With the wrong kind of fluid in . If brake fluid is spilled on the
You or others could be burned, the brake hydraulic system, vehicle's painted surfaces,
and the vehicle could be the brakes might not work well. the paint finish can be
This could cause a crash. Always damaged. Be careful not
damaged. Add brake fluid only
use the proper brake fluid. to spill brake fluid on the
when work is done on the brake
vehicle. If you do, wash it
hydraulic system. off immediately.
When the brake fluid falls to a low

level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 520.

Vehicle Care 10-29
Battery Vehicle Storage Starter Switch Check

Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label { WARNING { WARNING
when a new battery is needed.
Batteries have acid that can burn When you are doing this
you and gas that can explode. inspection, the vehicle could
on page 106 for battery location.
You can be badly hurt if you are move suddenly. If the vehicle
not careful. See Jump Starting on
{ DANGER page 1075 for tips on working
moves, you or others could be
injured.
Battery posts, terminals, and around a battery without
related accessories contain lead getting hurt. 1. Before starting this check, be
and lead compounds, chemicals sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
known to the State of California Infrequent Usage: Remove the
to cause cancer and reproductive black, negative () cable from the 2. Firmly apply both the parking
harm. Wash hands after handling. battery to keep the battery from brake and the regular brake.
running down. See Parking Brake on
page 929.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative () cable from the Do not use the accelerator
battery or use a battery trickle pedal, and be ready to turn off
charger. the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.

10-30 Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park)
ignition on, but do not start the
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { WARNING
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
When you are doing this your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move.
inspection, the vehicle could You or others could be injured
move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
moves, you or others could be Make sure there is room in front
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
injured.
While parked, and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake set, try to turn the ignition brake at once should the vehicle
1. Before starting this check, to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move.
be sure there is enough room position.
around the vehicle. It should
be parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the
2. Firmly apply the parking shift lever is in P (Park).
brake. See Parking Brake on
page 929.
. The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle Contact your dealer if service is
begins to move. required.

Vehicle Care 10-31
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement

vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, Windshield wiper blades should
set the parking brake. be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
. To check the parking brake's page 112 for more information
holding ability: With the engine on wiper blade inspection.
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot Replacement blades come in
pressure from the regular brake different types and are removed
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is in different ways. Here's how to
held by the parking brake only. remove the wiper blade:
. To check the P (Park) 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
mechanism's holding ability: connector away from the 2. While holding the wiper arm,
With the engine running, shift windshield. pull the clip up from the blade
to P (Park). Then release the connecting point, and pull the
parking brake followed by the blade assembly down toward the
regular brake. windshield to remove it from the
wiper arm.
Contact your dealer if service is
required. 3. Install the new wiper blade onto
the wiper arm and snap the clip
down into place.

10-32 Vehicle Care
To remove and replace the wiper 4. Be sure the two wiper blade Headlamp Aiming
blade element do the following: element notches are engaged
by the last claw set, and that Headlamp aim has been preset
1. The wiper blade element has
all the other claws are properly at the factory and should need no
two notches at one end which
engaged in the slots of the wiper further adjustment.
are engaged by the bottom claw
set of the wiper blade. At the blade element on both sides. However, if the vehicle is damaged
notched end of the wiper blade, in a crash, the headlamp aim may
pull the wiper blade element be affected. Aim adjustment to
from the wiper blade assembly. the low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
2. To replace the element, start at
their high-beam headlamps at you
the heel end of the wiper blade,
(for vertical aim).
which is the end nearest to
the base of the wiper arm, and If the headlamps need to be
slide the wiper blade element, re-aimed, it is recommended that
notched end last, into the wiper the vehicle be taken to the dealer
blade claw sets. for service.
3. To engage the last claw into the
notched end of the wiper blade
element, squeeze the wiper A. Correct Installation
blade element at the notched
B. Incorrect Installation
area, and push the wiper blade
element so the claw fits into the For the proper type and size
notch. of windshield wiper blades,
see Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 118.

Vehicle Care 10-33
Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn To replace one of these bulbs:
For the proper type of replacement Signal, Sidemarker, and 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
Parking Lamps page 105.
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 1037.
For any bulbchanging procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure A. Sidemarker 2. Remove the screw from the
to read and follow the instructions headlamp assembly.
on the bulb package. B. Low-Beam Headlamp
C. High-Beam Headlamp
D. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

10-34 Vehicle Care
6. Turn the old bulb

counterclockwise and
remove it from the retaining
ring by pulling it away from
the headlamp.
7. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by raising the lock
tab and pulling the connector
away from the bulb's base.
8. Install the electrical connector to
the bulb.
3. Pull up on the plastic headlamp 9. Install the new bulb by inserting 11. Push the headlamp assembly
retainer and remove it. the smallest tab on the bulb toward the vehicle.
base into the matching notch in
4. Pull the headlamp assembly the retaining ring. Turn the bulb
away from the vehicle and a quarter-turn clockwise until it
remove the electrical connector. stops.
5. Remove the round dust caps to 10. Reinstall the dust caps.
gain access to the bulbs.

Vehicle Care 10-35
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps
12. Push down on the plastic 13. Reinstall the screw from the
headlamp retainer to reinstall it. headlamp assembly.
A. Rear Sidemarker Lamp

B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal

10-36 Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs: 9. Push the new bulb straight in

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on until it clicks to install it.
page 210. 10. Reverse steps 1 through 7 to
2. Remove the convenience net reinstall.
(if equipped). Unhook the net
from the upper wing nut. License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Turn the lamp assembly
counterclockwise and pull
the lamp assembly out of the
connector.
5. Turn the two hex nuts 2. Pull the old bulb from the lamp
counterclockwise to assembly, keeping the bulb
remove them. straight as you pull it out.
6. Pull out the taillamp assembly 3. Install the new bulb.
and disconnect the wiring
harness. 4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the license plate lamp.
7. Turn the bulb socket
3. Turn the upper wing nut counterclockwise to remove it.
counterclockwise and remove it. 8. Pull the old bulb straight out to
4. Pull the carpet away from the remove it.
rear of the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-37
Replacement Bulbs Electrical System Fuses and circuit breakers protect

the following in the vehicle:
Exterior Lamp Bulb Electrical System . Headlamp Wiring
Number
Overload . Windshield Wiper Motor
Back-Up 921LL .
The vehicle has fuses and circuit Power Windows and Other
Front Parking/ breakers to protect against an Power Accessories
3157NAK
Turn Signal electrical system overload. Replace a bad fuse with a new one
License When the current electrical load is of the identical size and rating.
194LL
Plate Lamp too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If there is a problem on the road
Headlamps and closes, protecting the circuit and a fuse needs to be replaced,
until the current load returns to the same amperage fuse can be
High-Beam H9 normal or the problem is fixed. borrowed. Choose some feature of
Low-Beam H11 This greatly reduces the chance the vehicle that is not needed to use
of circuit overload and fire caused and replace it as soon as possible.
Sidemarker 194LL by electrical problems.
Stoplamp,
Taillamp, and 3057
Turn Signal
For replacement bulbs not listed

here, contact your dealer.

10-38 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle
some cases to remain off. Have
are protected from short circuits by
the headlamp wiring checked right
a combination of fuses and circuit
away if the lamps go on and off or
breakers. This greatly reduces the
remain off.
chance of fires caused by electrical
Windshield Wipers problems.
If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band
heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken
wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may Engine Compartment
cause wiper linkage damage. Fuse Block
Always clear ice and heavy snow The Engine Compartment Fuse
from the windshield before using Block is in the engine compartment.
the windshield wipers. See Engine Compartment Overview
If the overload is caused by an on page 106 for more information
electrical problem and not snow on location.
or ice, be sure to get it fixed. Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the The vehicle may not have all of the
vehicle may damage it. Always fuses, relays, and features shown.
keep the covers on any electrical
component.

Vehicle Care 10-39
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Air Conditioning Center Electronic
A/C CMPRSR
Compressor CHMSL/ HighMounted ETC/ECM Throttle
BCKUP Stoplamp, Control, ECM
Antilock Brake
Backup Lamp
ABS MTR 1 System (ABS) FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1
Motor 1 DISPLAY Display
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2
ABS MTR 2 ABS Motor 2 Daytime Running
DRL 1 Fog Lamps
Lamps 1 FOG LAMPS
AIR PUMP Air Pump (If Equipped)
Daytime Running
Air Injection DRL 2 FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
AIR SOL Lamps 2
Reactor Solenoid
Headlamp
Engine Control HDLP MDL
AIRBAG/ Module
Airbag, Display ECM IGN Module (ECM),
DISPLAY
Ignition HORN Horn
AUX PWR Auxiliary Power
ECM, HTD MIR Heated Mirror
BATT 1 Battery 1 Transmission
ECM/TCM INJ 1 Injector 1
BATT 2 Battery 2 Control
Module (TCM) INJ 2 Injector 2
BATT 3 Battery 3
EMISSIONS 1 Emissions 1 INT LIGHTS Interior Lamps
BATT 4 Battery 4
EMISSIONS 2 Emissions 2
Body Control
BCM
Module (BCM)

10-40 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relay Usage

Interior Lamps, Passenger Side A/C Air Conditioning
INT LTS/
Instrument Panel RT LO BEAM LowBeam CMPRSR Compressor
PNL DIM
Dimmer Headlamp
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1
Driver Side Passenger Side
RT PARK FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2
LT HI BEAM HighBeam Parking Lamp
Headlamp FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3
RT SPOT Right Spot
Driver Side FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
Passenger Side
LT LO BEAM LowBeam RT T/SIG
Turn Signal Lamp PWR/TRN Powertrain
Headlamp
Regulated REAR
Driver Side Rear Defogger
LT PARK RVC SEN Voltage Control DEFOG
Parking Lamp
Sensor STRTR Starter
LT SPOT Left Spot
STRG WHL Steering Wheel
Driver Side Turn
LT T/SIG STRTR Starter
Signal Lamp
TRANS Transmission
ONSTAR OnStar
WPR Wiper
PWR DROP/ Power Drop,
CRANK Crank WSW Windshield Wiper
RADIO Audio System
Passenger Side
RT HI BEAM HighBeam
Headlamp

Vehicle Care 10-41
Instrument Panel Fuse Fuses Usage

Block AIRBAG Airbags
AMP Amplifier
AUX Auxiliary Outlets
CNSTR Canister
DR/LCK Door Locks
HTD/SEAT Heated Seats
PWR/MIR Power Mirrors
The vehicle may not be equipped PWR/SEAT Power Seats
with all of the fuses, relays, and PWR/WNDW Power Window
features shown.
Retained
RAP
The fuse block is on the passenger Accessory Power
side of the vehicle in the carpet
S/ROOF Sunroof
molding. Remove the fuse block
door to access the fuses. TRUNK Trunk
TRUNK Trunk Relay
XM XM Radio

10-42 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Replace any tires that have
same danger as overloaded been damaged by impacts
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash with potholes, curbs, etc.
high-quality tires made by could cause serious injury.
a leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to
. Improperly repaired tires
See the warranty manual maintain the recommended can cause a crash. Only the
dealer or an authorized tire
for information regarding pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when service center should repair,
the tire warranty and where replace, dismount, and mount
to get service. For additional the tires are cold.
the tires.
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured,
. Do not spin the tires in
or broken by a sudden excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such
{ WARNING impact such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep as snow, mud, ice, etc.
tires at the recommended Excessive spinning may
. Poorly maintained and
pressure. cause the tires to explode.
improperly used tires are
dangerous. . Worn or old tires can cause
. Overloading the tires can a crash. If the tread is badly
cause overheating as a worn, replace them.
result of too much flexing. (Continued)
There could be a blowout and
a serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 912.
(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-43
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the (D) Tire Identification
Tire Size illustration later in this Number (TIN): The letters
Useful information about a section for more detail. and numbers following the DOT
tire is molded into its sidewall. (Department of Transportation)
The examples below show a (B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria code are the Tire Identification
typical passenger vehicle tire Number (TIN). The TIN shows
and a compact spare tire Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to the manufacturer and plant
sidewall. code, tire size, and date the tire
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification was manufactured. The TIN is
code molded onto the sidewall. molded onto both sides of the
GM's TPC specifications meet tire, although only one side may
or exceed all federal safety have the date of manufacture.
guidelines. (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
(C) DOT (Department of cord and number of plies in
of Transportation): The the sidewall and under the tread.
Department of Transportation (F) Uniform Tire Quality
(DOT) code indicates that Grading (UTQG): Tire
the tire is in compliance manufacturers are required
Passenger (PMetric) Tire Example with the U.S. Department to grade tires based on three
of Transportation Motor performance factors: treadwear,
(A) Tire Size: The tire size Vehicle Safety Standards. traction, and temperature
is a combination of letters and resistance. For more information
numbers used to define a see Uniform Tire Quality
particular tire's width, height, Grading on page 1061.
aspect ratio, construction type,

10-44 Vehicle Care
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation (B) Temporary Use Only: The TIN shows the
Load Limit: Maximum load The compact spare tire or manufacturer and plant
that can be carried and the temporary use tire has a tread code, tire size, and date
maximum pressure needed life of approximately 5 000 km the tire was manufactured.
to support that load. (3,000 mi) and should not be The TIN is molded onto both
driven at speeds over 105 km/h sides of the tire, although only
(65 mph). The compact spare one side may have the date
tire is for emergency use when of manufacture.
a regular road tire has lost air (D) Maximum Cold Inflation
and gone flat. If the vehicle Load Limit: Maximum load
has a compact spare tire, that can be carried and the
see Compact Spare Tire on maximum pressure needed
page 1074 and If a Tire Goes to support that load.
Flat on page 1065.
(E) Tire Inflation: The
(C) Tire Identification Number temporary use tire or compact
(TIN): The letters and numbers spare tire should be inflated
Compact Spare Tire Example following the DOT (Department to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
of Transportation) code is the information on tire pressure and
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
Tire Identification Number (TIN). inflation see Tire Pressure on
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread. page 1049.

Vehicle Care 10-45
(F) Tire Size: A combination Tire Designations (B) Tire Width: The threedigit
of letters and numbers define a number indicates the tire section
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, Tire Size width in millimeters from
construction type, and service The following is an example sidewall to sidewall.
description. The letter T as the of a typical passenger vehicle (C) Aspect Ratio: A twodigit
first character in the tire size tire size. number that indicates the tire
means the tire is for temporary heighttowidth measurements.
use only. For example, if the tire size
(G) TPC Spec (Tire aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
Performance Criteria item C of the illustration, it would
Specification): Original mean that the tire's sidewall is
equipment tires designed to 60 percent as high as it is wide.
GM's specific tire performance (A) Passenger (PMetric) Tire: (D) Construction Code: A
criteria have a TPC specification The United States version of letter code is used to indicate
code molded onto the sidewall. a metric tire sizing system. the type of ply construction in
GM's TPC specifications meet The letter P as the first the tire. The letter R means
or exceed all federal safety character in the tire size radial ply construction; the
guidelines. means a passenger vehicle letter D means diagonal or
tire engineered to standards bias ply construction; and the
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim letter B means beltedbias ply
Association. construction.

10-46 Vehicle Care
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: The Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
the wheel in inches. combined weight of optional tire in which the plies are laid
(F) Service Description: These accessories. Some examples at alternate angles less than
characters represent the load of optional accessories are, 90 degrees to the centerline
index and speed rating of the automatic transmission, power of the tread.
tire. The load index represents steering, power brakes, power Cold Tire Pressure: The
the load carrying capacity a tire windows, power seats, and air amount of air pressure in a tire,
is certified to carry. The speed conditioning. measured in kPa (kilopascal)
rating is the maximum speed a Aspect Ratio: The relationship or psi (pounds per square inch)
tire is certified to carry a load. of a tire's height to its width. before a tire has built up heat
Belt: A rubber coated layer of from driving. See Tire Pressure
Tire Terminology and cords that is located between on page 1049.
Definitions the plies and the tread. Cords Curb Weight: The weight of a
Air Pressure: The amount may be made from steel or motor vehicle with standard and
of air inside the tire pressing other reinforcing materials. optional equipment including
outward on each square inch Bead: The tire bead contains the maximum capacity of fuel,
of the tire. Air pressure is steel wires wrapped by steel oil, and coolant, but without
expressed in psi (pounds per cords that hold the tire onto passengers and cargo.
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). the rim.

Vehicle Care 10-47
DOT Markings: A code Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle

molded into the sidewall of The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb
a tire signifying that the tire that must always face outward weight, accessory weight,
is in compliance with the U.S. when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and
Department of Transportation Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight:
Standards. The DOT code The number of occupants a
includes the Tire Identification Light Truck (LTMetric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and vehicle is designed to seat
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).
designator which can also some multipurpose passenger
vehicles. See Vehicle Load Limits on
identify the tire manufacturer, page 912.
production plant, brand, and Load Index: An assigned
date of production. number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution :
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits carrying capacity of a tire. Outward Facing Sidewall:
on page 912. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The side of an asymmetrical tire
The maximum air pressure to that has a particular side that
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle faces outward when mounted
Weight Rating for the front axle. which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is on a vehicle. The side of the
See Vehicle Load Limits on tire that contains a whitewall,
page 912. molded onto the sidewall.
bears white lettering, or bears
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Maximum Load Rating: manufacturer, brand, and/or
Weight Rating for the rear axle. The load rating for a tire at the model name molding that is
See Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation higher or deeper than the same
page 912. pressure for that tire. moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.

10-48 Vehicle Care
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Sidewall: The portion of a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire
A tire used on passenger cars between the tread and the bead. Quality Grading Standards):
and some light duty trucks and Speed Rating: An A tire information system
multipurpose vehicles. alphanumeric code assigned to that provides consumers
Recommended Inflation a tire indicating the maximum with ratings for a tire's traction,
Pressure: Vehicle speed at which a tire can temperature, and treadwear.
manufacturer's recommended operate. Ratings are determined
tire inflation pressure as by tire manufacturers using
Traction: The friction between government testing procedures.
shown on the tire placard. the tire and the road surface.
See Tire Pressure on The ratings are molded into
The amount of grip provided. the sidewall of the tire.
page 1049 and Vehicle
Load Limits on page 912. Tread: The portion of a tire See Uniform Tire Quality
that comes into contact with Grading on page 1061.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic the road.
tire in which the ply cords that Vehicle Capacity Weight:
extend to the beads are laid at Treadwear Indicators: Narrow The number of designated
90 degrees to the centerline of bands, sometimes called wear seating positions multiplied by
the tread. bars, that show across the 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire (1/16 in) of tread remains. Limits on page 912.
and upon which the tire beads See When It Is Time for New
are seated. Tires on page 1057.

Vehicle Care 10-49
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Pressure Overinflated tires, or tires

Tire: Load on an individual tire that have too much air, can
due to curb weight, accessory Tires need the correct amount result in:
weight, occupant weight, and of air pressure to operate
effectively. . Unusual wear.
cargo weight.
Notice: Neither tire . Poor handling.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a underinflation nor . Rough ride.
vehicle showing the vehicle overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires
. Needless damage from
capacity weight and the road hazards.
original equipment tire size that do not have enough air,
and recommended inflation can result in: A vehicle-specific Tire and
pressure. See Tire and Loading . Tire overloading and Loading Information label
Information Label under Vehicle over-heating which could is attached to the vehicle.
Load Limits on page 912. lead to a blowout. This label shows the vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
. Premature or correct inflation pressures for
irregular wear. the tires when they are cold.
. Poor handling. The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
. Reduced fuel economy. label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
the vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.

10-50 Vehicle Care
For additional information How to Check If the cold tire inflation pressure
regarding how much weight Use a good quality pocket-type matches the recommended
the vehicle can carry, and gauge to check tire pressure. pressure on the Tire and
an example of the Tire and You cannot tell if the tires are Loading Information label,
Loading Information label, properly inflated simply by no further adjustment is
see Vehicle Load Limits on looking at them. Radial tires may necessary. If the inflation
page 912. How you load the look properly inflated even when pressure is low, add air until
vehicle affects vehicle handling they are underinflated. Check you reach the recommended
and ride comfort. Never load the tire's inflation pressure when amount.
the vehicle with more weight the tires are cold. Cold means If you overfill the tire, release
than it was designed to carry. the vehicle has been sitting for air by pushing on the metal stem
When to Check at least three hours or driven in the center of the tire valve.
no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). Recheck the tire pressure with
Check the tires once a month or
Remove the valve cap from the the tire gauge.
more. Do not forget to check the
compact spare tire, if the vehicle tire valve stem. Press the tire Be sure to put the valve caps
has one. The compact spare gauge firmly onto the valve to back on the valve stems.
should be at 420 kPa (60 psi). get a pressure measurement. They help prevent leaks by
For additional information keeping out dirt and moisture.
regarding the compact spare
tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 1074.

Vehicle Care 10-51
Tire Pressure Monitor As an added safety feature, your Please note that the TPMS is
vehicle has been equipped with not a substitute for proper tire
System a tire pressure monitoring system maintenance, and it is the driver's
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that illuminates a low responsibility to maintain correct
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor tire pressure telltale when one or tire pressure, even if underinflation
technology to check tire pressure more of your tires is significantly has not reached the level to trigger
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor underinflated. illumination of the TPMS low tire
the air pressure in your tires and Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale.
transmit tire pressure readings to pressure telltale illuminates, you Your vehicle has also been
a receiver located in the vehicle. should stop and check your tires as equipped with a TPMS malfunction
Each tire, including the spare soon as possible, and inflate them indicator to indicate when the
(if provided), should be checked to the proper pressure. Driving on system is not operating properly.
monthly when cold and inflated to a significantly underinflated tire The TPMS malfunction indicator is
the inflation pressure recommended causes the tire to overheat and can combined with the low tire pressure
by the vehicle manufacturer on lead to tire failure. Underinflation telltale. When the system detects a
the vehicle placard or tire inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and malfunction, the telltale will flash for
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tire tread life, and may affect the approximately one minute and then
tires of a different size than the size vehicle's handling and stopping remain continuously illuminated.
indicated on the vehicle placard or ability. This sequence will continue upon
tire inflation pressure label, you subsequent vehicle startups as
should determine the proper tire long as the malfunction exists.
inflation pressure for those tires.)

10-52 Vehicle Care
When the malfunction indicator Federal Communications

is illuminated, the system may Commission (FCC) and
not be able to detect or signal low Industry Canada
tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety See Radio Frequency
of reasons, including the installation Statement on page 1317 for
of replacement or alternate tires or information regarding Part 15
of the Federal Communications When a low tire pressure condition
wheels on the vehicle that prevent is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the TPMS from functioning properly. Commission (FCC) rules and
Industry Canada Standards the low tire pressure warning light
Always check the TPMS malfunction located on the instrument cluster.
telltale after replacing one or more RSS-210/220/310.
If the warning light comes on, stop
tires or wheels on your vehicle to as soon as possible and inflate the
ensure that the replacement or Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure
alternate tires and wheels allow Operation shown on the Tire and Loading
the TPMS to continue to function Information label. See Vehicle
properly. This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). Load Limits on page 912.
See Tire Pressure Monitor The TPMS is designed to warn A message to check the pressure
Operation on page 1052 for the driver when a low tire pressure in a specific tire displays in the
additional information. condition exists. TPMS sensors are Driver Information Center (DIC).
mounted onto each tire and wheel The low tire pressure warning
assembly, excluding the spare tire light and the DIC warning message
and wheel assembly. The TPMS come on at each ignition cycle until
sensors monitor the air pressure the tires are inflated to the correct
in the tires and transmit the tire inflation pressure. Using the DIC,
pressure readings to a receiver tire pressure levels can be viewed.
located in the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-53
For additional information and The TPMS can warn about a TPMS Malfunction Light and
details about the DIC operation low tire pressure condition but Message
and displays, see Driver Information it does not replace normal tire
Center (DIC) on page 526 and maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function
Tire Messages on page 537. on page 1056, Tire Rotation on properly if one or more of the
page 1056, and Tires on TPMS sensors are missing or
The low tire pressure warning light inoperable. When the system
may come on in cool weather when page 1042.
detects a malfunction, the low tire
the vehicle is first started, and then Notice: Tire sealant materials are pressure warning light flashes for
turn off as the vehicle is driven. not all the same. A non-approved about one minute and then stays
This could be an early indicator tire sealant could damage the on for the remainder of the ignition
that the air pressure is getting low TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor cycle. A DIC warning message also
and needs to be inflated to the damage caused by using displays. The malfunction light and
proper pressure. an incorrect tire sealant is DIC warning message come on at
A Tire and Loading Information not covered by the vehicle each ignition cycle until the problem
label shows the size of the original warranty. Always use only is corrected. Some of the conditions
equipment tires and the correct the GM-approved tire sealant that can cause these to come
inflation pressure for the tires when available through your dealer on are:
they are cold. See Vehicle Load or included in the vehicle. . One of the road tires has been
Limits on page 912, for an example replaced with the spare tire.
of the Tire and Loading Information The spare tire does not have a
label and its location. Also see Tire TPMS sensor. The malfunction
Pressure on page 1049. light and the DIC message
should go off after the road
tire is replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See TPMS Sensor
Matching Process later in this
section.

10-54 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matching . Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching
process was not done or not match the original equipment Process
not completed successfully tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
after rotating the tires. The other than those recommended Each TPMS sensor has a unique
malfunction light and the DIC could prevent the TPMS from identification code. The identification
message should go off after functioning properly. See Buying code needs to be matched to a
successfully completing the New Tires on page 1058. new tire/wheel position after rotating
sensor matching process. the vehicles tires or replacing
. Operating electronic devices or one or more of the TPMS sensors.
See TPMS Sensor Matching being near facilities using radio
Process later in this section. Also, the TPMS sensor matching
wave frequencies similar to the process should be performed after
. One or more TPMS sensors TPMS could cause the TPMS replacing a spare tire with a road
are missing or damaged. The sensors to malfunction. tire containing the TPMS sensor.
malfunction light and the DIC If the TPMS is not functioning The malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off when the properly, it cannot detect or signal a message should go off at the next
TPMS sensors are installed and low tire condition. See your dealer ignition cycle. The sensors are
the sensor matching process for service if the TPMS malfunction matched to the tire/wheel positions,
is performed successfully. light and DIC message come on using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
See your dealer for service. and stay on. following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool.

Vehicle Care 10-55
There are two minutes to match 4. Start with the driver side 8. Proceed to the driver side rear
the first tire/wheel position, and front tire. tire, and repeat the procedure
five minutes overall to match all 5. Place the relearn tool against in Step 5. The horn sounds
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes the tire sidewall, near the valve two times to indicate the sensor
longer, the matching process stops stem. Then press the button identification code has been
and must be restarted. to activate the TPMS sensor. matched to the driver side rear
The TPMS sensor matching A horn chirp confirms that the tire, and the TPMS sensor
process is: sensor identification code has matching process is no longer
been matched to this tire and active. The TIRE LEARNING
1. Set the parking brake. ACTIVE message on the DIC
wheel position.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with display screen goes off.
the engine off. 6. Proceed to the passenger
side front tire, and repeat the 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Press the Remote Keyless procedure in Step 5. 10. Set all four tires to the
Entry (RKE) transmitter's Q recommended air pressure
and " buttons at the same time 7. Proceed to the passenger
side rear tire, and repeat the level as indicated on the Tire
for approximately five seconds. and Loading Information label.
The horn sounds twice to signal procedure in Step 5.
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays
on the DIC screen.

10-56 Vehicle Care
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a puncture, cut, See When It Is Time for New
or other damage that cannot Tires on page 1057 and Wheel
GM recommends that the tires, be repaired well because of Replacement on page 1063.
including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the
vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month. Tire Rotation
Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated
. The indicators at three or every 12 000 km (7,500 mi).
more places around the tire See Scheduled Maintenance on
can be seen. page 112.
. There is cord or fabric The purpose of a regular tire
showing through the tire's rotation is to achieve a uniform
rubber. wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
. The tread or sidewall is continues to perform most like it When rotating the vehicle's tires,
cracked, cut, or snagged did when the tires were new. always use the correct rotation
deep enough to show cord pattern shown here.
or fabric. Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon Do not include the compact
. The tire has a bump, bulge, as possible and check wheel spare tire in the tire rotation.
or split. alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels.

Vehicle Care 10-57
After the tires have been When It Is Time for New

rotated, adjust the front and rear { WARNING Tires
inflation pressures as shown on Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
the Tire and Loading Information Factors such as maintenance,
parts to which it is fastened, can temperatures, driving speeds,
label. See Tire Pressure on make wheel nuts become loose vehicle loading, and road conditions
page 1049 and Vehicle Load after time. The wheel could come affect the wear rate of the tires.
Limits on page 912. off and cause an accident. When
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor changing a wheel, remove any
System. See Tire Pressure rust or dirt from places where
Monitor Operation on the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or
page 1052.
a paper towel to do this; but be
Make certain that all wheel sure to use a scraper or wire
nuts are properly tightened. brush later, if needed, to get all
See Wheel Nut Torque under the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire
Capacities and Specifications on Goes Flat on page 1065.
page 122.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or Treadwear indicators are one
way to tell when it is time for new
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
tires. Treadwear indicators appear
or rust build-up. Do not get when the tires have only 1.6 mm
grease on the flat wheel (1/16 in) or less of tread remaining.
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.

10-58 Vehicle Care
See Tire Inspection on page 1056 Vehicle Storage Buying New Tires
and Tire Rotation on page 1056 for
Tires age when stored normally GM has developed and matched
more information.
mounted on a parked vehicle. specific tires for the vehicle.
The rubber in tires ages over time. Park a vehicle that will be stored
This also applies for the spare tire, The original equipment tires
for at least a month in a cool, dry,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is clean area away from direct sunlight installed on the vehicle, when
never used. Multiple conditions to slow aging. This area should be it was new, were designed
including temperatures, loading free of grease, gasoline, or other to meet General Motors
conditions, and inflation pressure substances that can deteriorate Tire Performance Criteria
maintenance affect how fast aging rubber. Specification (TPC Spec)
takes place. Tires will typically system rating. If you need
Parking for an extended period
need to be replaced due to wear replacement tires, GM strongly
can cause flat spots on the tires
before they may need to be recommends that you get
that may result in vibrations while
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
driving. When storing a vehicle for tires with the same TPC Spec
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
at least a month, remove the tires rating. This way, the vehicle
or raise the vehicle to reduce the will continue to have tires that
weight from the tires. are designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.

Vehicle Care 10-59
GM's exclusive TPC Spec will help keep the vehicle

system considers over a dozen performing most like it did { WARNING
critical specifications that when the tires were new. Mixing tires could cause you
impact the overall performance Replacing less than a full set to lose control while driving.
of the vehicle, including brake of tires can affect the braking If you mix tires of different
system performance, ride and handling performance of the sizes, brands, or types
and handling, traction control, vehicle. See Tire Inspection on (radial and bias-belted tires),
and tire pressure monitoring page 1056 and Tire Rotation on the vehicle may not handle
performance. GM's TPC Spec page 1056 for information on properly, and you could have
number is molded onto the tire's proper tire rotation. a crash. Using tires of different
sidewall near the tire size. If the sizes, brands, or types may
tires have an allseason tread { WARNING also cause damage to the
design, the TPC Spec number vehicle. Be sure to use the
will be followed by an MS Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting to correct size, brand, and type
for mud and snow. See Tire of tires on all wheels. It is
Sidewall Labeling on page 1043 mount or dismount a tire could
cause injury or death. Only your all right to drive with the
for additional information. compact spare temporarily,
dealer or authorized tire service
GM recommends replacing tires center should mount or dismount as it was developed for use
in sets of four. This is because the tires. on the vehicle. See Compact
uniform tread depth on all tires Spare Tire on page 1074.

10-60 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire Different Size Tires and

{ WARNING pressure monitoring system Wheels
Using bias-ply tires on the could give an inaccurate
lowpressure warning if If wheels or tires are installed that
vehicle may cause the wheel are a different size than the original
rim flanges to develop cracks nonTPC Spec rated tires
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
after many miles of driving. are installed on the vehicle. performance, including its braking,
A tire and/or wheel could fail NonTPC Spec rated tires may ride and handling characteristics,
suddenly and cause a crash. give a lowpressure warning stability, and resistance to rollover
Use only radial-ply tires with that is higher or lower than the may be affected. If the vehicle has
the wheels on the vehicle. proper warning level you would electronic systems such as antilock
get with TPC Spec rated tires. brakes, rollover airbags, traction
See Tire Pressure Monitor control, and electronic stability
If you must replace the vehicle's System on page 1051. control, the performance of these
tires with those that do not systems can also be affected.
have a TPC Spec number, The vehicle's original equipment
make sure they are the same tires are listed on the Tire
size, load range, speed rating, and Loading Information label.
and construction type (radial See Vehicle Load Limits on
and biasbelted tires) as the page 912 for more information
vehicle's original tires. about the Tire and Loading
Information label and its
location on the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-61
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system

{ WARNING Grading does not apply to deep
If different sized wheels tread, winter-type snow tires,
Quality grades can be found space-saver, or temporary use
are used, there may not
be an acceptable level of
where applicable on the tire spare tires, tires with nominal
performance and safety if sidewall between tread shoulder rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
tires not recommended for and maximum section width. (25 to 30 cm), or to some
those wheels are selected. For example: limited-production tires.
This increases the chance of Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on
a crash and serious injury. Temperature A General Motors passenger
Only use GM specific wheel
The following information relates cars and light trucks may vary
and tire systems developed
to the system developed by the with respect to these grades,
for the vehicle, and have them
properly installed by a GM United States National Highway they must also conform to
certified technician. Traffic Safety Administration federal safety requirements and
(NHTSA), which grades tires additional General Motors Tire
by treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC)
See Buying New Tires on standards.
page 1058 and Accessories temperature performance.
and Modifications on page 103 This applies only to vehicles All Passenger Car Tires Must
for additional information. sold in the United States. Conform to Federal Safety
The grades are molded on the Requirements In Addition
sidewalls of most passenger car To These Grades.
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality

10-62 Vehicle Care
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C Temperature A, B, C

The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from The temperature grades
comparative rating based highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, are A (the highest), B, and C,
on the wear rate of the tire and C. Those grades represent representing the tire's resistance
when tested under controlled the tire's ability to stop on to the generation of heat and
conditions on a specified wet pavement as measured its ability to dissipate heat
government test course. under controlled conditions when tested under controlled
For example, a tire graded on specified government conditions on a specified
150 would wear one and a test surfaces of asphalt and indoor laboratory test wheel.
half (1) times as well on concrete. A tire marked C may Sustained high temperature can
the government course as have poor traction performance. cause the material of the tire
a tire graded 100. The relative Warning: The traction grade to degenerate and reduce tire
performance of tires depends assigned to this tire is based life, and excessive temperature
upon the actual conditions of on straight-ahead braking can lead to sudden tire failure.
their use, however, and may traction tests, and does not The grade C corresponds to a
depart significantly from the include acceleration, cornering, level of performance which all
norm due to variations in hydroplaning, or peak traction passenger car tires must meet
driving habits, service characteristics. under the Federal Motor Safety
practices and differences Standard No. 109. Grades B
in road characteristics and and A represent higher
climate. levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.

Vehicle Care 10-63
Warning: The temperature Wheel Replacement

grade for this tire is established { WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,
for a tire that is properly cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement
inflated and not overloaded. corroded. If wheel nuts keep wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Excessive speed, underinflation, coming loose, the wheel, wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could
or excessive loading, either bolts, and wheel nuts should be affect the braking and handling
separately or in combination, replaced. If the wheel leaks air, of the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
can cause heat buildup and replace it. Some aluminum wheels and cause loss of control, causing
possible tire failure. can be repaired. See your dealer a crash. Always use the correct
if any of these conditions exist. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
Wheel Alignment and Tire Your dealer will know the kind of nuts for replacement.
Balance wheel that is needed.
The tires and wheels were Each new wheel should have Notice: The wrong wheel can
aligned and balanced at the the same load-carrying capacity, also cause problems with
factory to provide the longest tire diameter, width, offset, and be bearing life, brake cooling,
life and best overall performance. mounted the same way as the speedometer or odometer
Adjustments to wheel alignment and one it replaces. calibration, headlamp aim,
tire balancing will not be necessary bumper height, vehicle ground
Replace wheels, wheel bolts,
on a regular basis. However, check clearance, and tire or tire chain
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
the alignment if there is unusual tire clearance to the body and
System (TPMS) sensors with new
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to chassis.
GM original equipment parts.
one side or the other. If the vehicle See If a Tire Goes Flat on
vibrates when driving on a smooth page 1065 for more information.
road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.

10-64 Vehicle Care
Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING { WARNING Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
Replacing a wheel with a used Do not use tire chains. There is recommends it for use on the
one is dangerous. How it has not enough clearance. Tire chains vehicle and tire size combination
been used or how far it has been used on a vehicle without the and road conditions. Follow
driven may be unknown. It could proper amount of clearance can that manufacturer's instructions.
fail suddenly and cause a crash. cause damage to the brakes, To help avoid damage to the
When replacing wheels, use a suspension or other vehicle parts. vehicle, drive slowly, readjust
new GM original equipment The area damaged by the tire or remove the device if it is
wheel. chains could cause you to lose contacting the vehicle, and do not
control of the vehicle and you or spin the vehicle's wheels. If you
others may be injured in a crash. do find traction devices that will
(Continued) fit, install them on the front tires.

Vehicle Care 10-65
If a Tire Goes Flat under control by steering the way

you want the vehicle to go. It may { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blowout be very bumpy and noisy, but you
while you are driving, especially can still steer. Gently brake to a Lifting a vehicle and getting
if you maintain the vehicle's tires stop, well off the road, if possible. under it to do maintenance or
properly. If air goes out of a tire, repairs is dangerous without the
it is much more likely to leak out appropriate safety equipment and
slowly. But if you should ever have { WARNING training. If a jack is provided with
a blowout, here are a few tips about Driving on a flat tire will cause the vehicle, it is designed only for
what to expect and what to do: permanent damage to the tire. changing a flat tire. If it is used for
If a front tire fails, the flat tire Re-inflating a tire after it has anything else, you or others could
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle been driven on while severely be badly injured or killed if the
toward that side. Take your foot underinflated or flat may cause vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
off the accelerator pedal and grip a blowout and a serious crash. is provided with the vehicle, only
the steering wheel firmly. Steer to Never attempt to re-inflate a use it for changing a flat tire.
maintain lane position, and then tire that has been driven on
gently brake to a stop, well off the while severely underinflated If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
road, if possible. or flat. Have your dealer or an and wheel damage by driving slowly
A rear blowout, particularly on a authorized tire service center to a level place, well off the road,
curve, acts much like a skid and repair or replace the flat tire as if possible. Turn on the hazard
may require the same correction soon as possible. warning flashers. See Hazard
you would use in a skid. In any rear Warning Flashers on page 64.
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle

10-66 Vehicle Care
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), Tire Changing

{ WARNING use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement Removing the Spare Tire and
Changing a tire can be of wheel blocks (A). Tools
dangerous. The vehicle can
slip off the jack and roll over The equipment you will need is
or fall causing injury or death. located in the trunk.
Find a level place to change the 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
tire. To help prevent the vehicle page 210.
from moving: 2. Remove the convenience net if
1. Set the parking brake firmly. the vehicle has one.
2. Put an automatic 3. Remove the spare tire cover.
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual A. Wheel Block
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse). B. Flat Tire
3. Turn off the engine and do The following information explains

not restart while the vehicle how to repair or change a tire.
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on
both sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed. 4. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and remove it.

Vehicle Care 10-67
5. Remove the compact spare tire. Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
This vehicle may have aluminum
wheels with exposed wheel nuts.
Use the wheel wrench to loosen
all the wheel nuts. Do not remove
them yet.
Or, this vehicle may have steel
wheels with plastic covers.
The tools you will need to change a

tire include the jack (A), extension
6. Turn the nut holding the jack and protection guide (B), and wheel
counterclockwise and remove it. wrench (C).
Then remove the jack and
wrench.
To remove the plastic covers and

wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic
nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction.

10-68 Vehicle Care
If needed, finish loosening them

with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps will not come off.
If needed, use the flat end of the
wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off.
The edge of the wheel cover could
be sharp, so do not try to remove
it with your bare hands. Do not
drop the cover or lay it face down,
as it could become scratched or
damaged. Store the wheel cover
in the trunk until the flat tire is 2. Turn the wheel wrench 3. For all wheel types, find
repaired or replaced. counterclockwise once on the jacking location using
each wheel nut to loosen it. the diagram above and the
Once you have removed the wheel
Do not remove them yet. corresponding jacking notches
cover, use the following procedure
to remove the flat tire and install the located on the bottom side of the
spare tire. plastic molding. The notches in
the plastic molding are marked
1. Do a safety check before with a triangle shape to help you
proceeding. See If a Tire find them.
Goes Flat on page 1065.
The front location is about
17.7 cm (7.0 in) from the rear
edge of the front wheel well.
The rear location is about
11.4 cm (4.5 in) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.

Vehicle Care 10-69
4. Put the compact spare tire

near you. { WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
{ WARNING under it to do maintenance or
Getting under a vehicle when it repairs is dangerous without the
is jacked up is dangerous. If the appropriate safety equipment and
vehicle slips off the jack you could training. If a jack is provided with
be badly injured or killed. Never the vehicle, it is designed only for
get under a vehicle when it is changing a flat tire. If it is used for
supported only by a jack. anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the
is provided with the vehicle, only
jack handle clockwise. Raise
{ WARNING use it for changing a flat tire. the vehicle far enough off the
Raising the vehicle with the ground to install the compact
jack improperly positioned can spare tire.
damage the vehicle and even 6. Remove all wheel nuts and the
make the vehicle fall. To help flat tire.
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.

10-70 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be
7. Remove any rust or dirt from the 9. Reinstall the wheel nuts with
sure to use a scraper or wire
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, the rounded end of the nuts
brush later, if needed, to get all and spare wheel. toward the wheel. Tighten each
the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire nut clockwise by hand until the
Goes Flat on page 1065. 8. Install the compact spare tire.
wheel is held against the hub.
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.

Vehicle Care 10-71
WARNING (Continued)
to the proper torque specification

after replacing. Follow the
torque specification supplied by
the aftermarket manufacturer
when using accessory locking
wheel nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 122 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
10. Lower the vehicle by 11. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
turning the jack handle Notice: Improperly tightened in a crisscross sequence as
counterclockwise. Lower wheel nuts can lead to brake shown.
the jack completely. pulsation and rotor damage. Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
To avoid expensive brake repairs, on the vehicle's compact spare.
{ WARNING evenly tighten the wheel nuts If you try to put a wheel cover on
in the proper sequence and to the compact spare, the cover or
Wheel nuts that are improperly or the proper torque specification. the spare could be damaged.
incorrectly tightened can cause See Capacities and Specifications
the wheels to become loose or on page 122 for the wheel nut
come off. The wheel nuts should torque specification.
be tightened with a torque wrench
(Continued)

10-72 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire To store a full-size tire:

and Tools 1. Install the tools in their original
location in the trunk area and
{ WARNING secure.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other 2. Place the tire valve stem facing
down and the protector/guide
equipment in the passenger
placed through a wheel bolt
compartment of the vehicle could
hole and threaded onto the
cause injury. In a sudden stop or bolt screw.
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these 3. Remove the protector and attach
in the proper place. the retainer securely
4. Store the cover as far forward as
After the compact spare tire has possible.
been installed on the vehicle, When storing a compact spare tire
store the flat tire in the trunk. in the trunk, put the protector back
When storing a full-size tire, in the foam holder.
use the extension with the extension The compact spare is for temporary
protector, located in the foam use only. Replace the compact
holder, to help avoid wheel surface spare tire with a full-size tire as
damage. soon as you can. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 1074. Use this
as a guide for storing the compact
spare tire and tools. Compact Spare Tire

Vehicle Care 10-73
A. Cover A. Retainer
B. Retainer B. Full-Size Flat Tire
C. Compact Spare Tire C. Protective Guide
D. Wing Nut D. Extension Bolt Screw
E. Jack E. Wing Nut
F. Wheel Wrench F. Jack
G. Extension Protector G. Wheel Wrench
H. Foam Holder H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw I. Bolt Screw
Full-Size Flat Tire

10-74 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire After installing the compact spare Notice: When the compact
on the vehicle, you should stop as spare is installed, do not take
soon as possible and make sure the vehicle through an automatic
{ WARNING the spare tire is correctly inflated. car wash with guide rails. The
Driving with more than one The compact spare is made to compact spare can get caught on
perform well at speeds up to the rails which can damage the
compact spare tire at a time
105 km/h (65 mph) for distances up tire, wheel and other parts of the
could result in loss of braking
to 5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you vehicle.
and handling. This could lead can finish your trip and have the
to a crash and you or others Do not use the compact spare on
full-size tire repaired or replaced other vehicles.
could be injured. Use only one where you want. You must calibrate
compact spare tire at a time. the tire inflation monitor system after And do not mix the compact spare
installing or removing the compact tire or wheel with other wheels or
Although the compact spare tire spare. See Tire Pressure Monitor tires. They will not fit. Keep the
was fully inflated when the vehicle System on page 1051. The system spare tire and its wheel together.
was new, it can lose air after a may not work correctly when the Notice: Tire chains will not fit
time. Check the inflation pressure compact spare is installed on the the compact spare. Using them
regularly. It should be 420 kPa vehicle. Of course, it's best to can damage the vehicle and can
(60 psi). replace the spare with a full-size damage the chains too. Do not
tire as soon as you can. The spare use tire chains on the compact
will last longer and be in good spare.
shape in case you need it again.

Vehicle Care 10-75
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
For more information about the the vehicle that would not be but be sure the vehicles are
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty. not touching each other. If they
page 1029. are, it could cause a ground
Trying to start the vehicle by
If your vehicle's battery has run pushing or pulling it will not connection you do not want.
down, you may want to use another work, and it could damage the You would not be able to start
vehicle and some jumper cables to vehicle. your vehicle, and the bad
start your vehicle. Be sure to use grounding could damage
1. Check the other vehicle. It must the electrical systems.
the following steps to do it safely.
have a 12volt battery with a
negative ground system. To avoid the possibility of
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle
the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both
Batteries can hurt you. They can that has a 12-volt system with vehicles involved in the jump
be dangerous because: a negative ground for jump start procedure. Put an
starting. If the other vehicle does automatic transmission
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a in P (Park) or a manual
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles transmission in N (Neutral)
. They contain gas that can can be damaged. before setting the parking
explode or ignite. brake.
. They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.

10-76 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the radio or other 4. Open the hoods and locate the
accessories are left on during batteries. Find the positive (+)
the jump starting procedure, they and negative () terminal
could be damaged. The repairs locations on each vehicle.
would not be covered by the You will not need to access
warranty. Always turn off the your battery for jump starting.
radio and other accessories Your vehicle has a remote
when jump starting the vehicle. positive (+) jump starting
3. Turn off the ignition on both terminal for that purpose.
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary The remote positive (+)
accessories plugged into the terminal is located in the
cigarette lighter or the accessory engine compartment on the
power outlets. Turn off the radio passenger side of the vehicle, To uncover the remote
and all lamps that are not on the underhood fuse block. positive (+) terminal, remove
needed. This will avoid sparks See Engine Compartment the fuse block cover. You
and help save both batteries. Overview on page 106 for should always use the remote
And it could save the radio! more information on location. positive (+) terminal instead of
the positive (+) terminal on the
battery.

Vehicle Care 10-77
5. Check that the jumper cables

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
An electric fan can start up even add water to take care of that get a shock. The vehicles could
when the engine is not running first. If you do not, explosive gas be damaged too.
and can injure you. Keep hands, could be present.
clothing and tools away from any Before you connect the cables,
Battery fluid contains acid that here are some basic things you
underhood electric fan. can burn you. Do not get it on should know. Positive (+) will go
you. If you accidentally get it in to positive (+) or to a remote
your eyes or on your skin, flush positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
{ WARNING the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
has one. Negative () will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
Using an open flame near a part or to a remote negative ()
battery can cause battery gas to terminal if the vehicle has one.
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been { WARNING Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (), or you will get
blinded. Use a flashlight if you Fans or other moving engine a short that would damage
need more light. parts can injure you badly. Keep the battery and maybe other
Be sure the battery has enough your hands away from moving parts too. And do not connect
water. You do not need to add parts once the engine is running. the negative () cable to the
water to the battery installed in negative () terminal on the
your new vehicle. But if a battery dead battery because this
can cause sparks.
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
(Continued)

10-78 Vehicle Care
6. Connect the red positive (+) 9. Connect the other end of the
cable to the positive (+) terminal negative () cable at least 45 cm
location of the vehicle with the (18 in) away from the dead
dead battery. Use a remote battery, but not near engine
positive (+) terminal if the parts that move. The electrical
vehicle has one. connection is just as good there,
7. Do not let the other end and the chance of sparks getting
touch metal. Connect it to the back to the battery is much less.
positive (+) terminal location of 10. Now start the vehicle with
the vehicle with the good battery. the good battery and run the
Use a remote positive (+) engine for a while.
terminal if the vehicle has one. 11. Try to start the vehicle that
Jumper Cable Removal
8. Now connect the black had the dead battery. If it will
negative () cable to the not start after a few tries, it A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
negative () terminal location of probably needs service. Part or Remote Negative ()
the vehicle with the good battery. Terminal
Notice: If the jumper cables are
Use a remote negative () connected or removed in the B. Good Battery or Remote
terminal if the vehicle has one. wrong order, electrical shorting Positive (+) Terminal and
Do not let the other end touch may occur and damage the Remote Negative () Terminals
anything until the next step. vehicle. The repairs would not be C. Dead Battery or Remote
The other end of the negative () covered by the vehicle warranty. Positive (+) Terminal
cable does not go to the dead Always connect and remove the
battery. It goes to a heavy, jumper cables in the correct
unpainted metal engine part or order, making sure that the
to a remote negative () terminal cables do not touch each other
on the vehicle with the dead or other metal.
battery.

Vehicle Care 10-79
To disconnect the jumper cables Towing Recreational Vehicle

from both vehicles, do the following:
Towing
1. Disconnect the black Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means
negative () cable from the
vehicle that had the dead Notice: To avoid damage, towing the vehicle behind another
battery. the disabled vehicle should be vehicle such as a motor home.
towed with all four wheels off The two most common types of
2. Disconnect the black the ground. Care must be taken recreational vehicle towing are
negative () cable from the with vehicles that have low known as dinghy towing and dolly
vehicle with the good battery. ground clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) equipment. Always flatbed on vehicle with all four wheels on the
cable from the vehicle with the a car carrier. ground. Dolly towing is towing the
good battery. vehicle with two wheels on the
Consult your dealer or a
ground and two wheels up on a
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) professional towing service
device known as a dolly.
cable from the other vehicle. if the disabled vehicle must be
towed. See Roadside Assistance
5. Return the fuse block cover to its Program on page 136.
original position.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing in this
section.

10-80 Vehicle Care
Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing Dolly Towing

consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
. What is the towing capacity
of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow
vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
. What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
. Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your Notice: If the vehicle is Use the following procedure to dolly
dealer or trailering professional towed with all four wheels tow the vehicle from the front:
for additional advice and on the ground, the drivetrain
equipment recommendations. components could be damaged. 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
The repairs would not be covered vehicle following the dolly
. Is the vehicle ready to be manufacturer's instructions.
towed? Just as preparing the by the vehicle warranty. Do not
vehicle for a long trip, make tow the vehicle with all four 2. Drive the front wheels onto the
sure the vehicle is prepared wheels on the ground. dolly.
to be towed. The vehicle was not designed to 3. Shift the transmission to
be towed with all four wheels on P (Park).
the ground. If the vehicle must
be towed, a dolly should be used. 4. Firmly set the parking brake.
See Dolly Towing that follows for
more information.

Vehicle Care 10-81
5. Use an adequate clamping Appearance Care Notice: Certain cleaners contain

device designed for towing to chemicals that can damage
ensure that the front wheels are the emblems or nameplates on
locked into the straight position. Exterior Care the vehicle. Check the cleaning
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly If dirt and/or contaminants build product label. If it states that it
following the manufacturer's up in the glass seals, use a cloth should not be used on plastic
instructions. and water to clean the glass seals. parts, do not use it on the vehicle
Silicone grease on weatherstrips or damage may occur and it
7. Release the parking brake only will make them last longer, seal would not be covered by the
after the vehicle being towed is better, and not stick or squeak. warranty.
firmly attached to the towing Apply silicone grease with a clean
vehicle. Do not wash the vehicle in
cloth. During very cold, damp direct sunlight. Use a car washing
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF weather frequent application may soap. Do not use cleaning agents
and remove the key. be required. See Recommended that are petroleum based or
Fluids and Lubricants on page 116. that contain acid or abrasives,
Washing the Vehicle as they can damage the paint,
metal or plastic on the vehicle.
The best way to preserve the
vehicle's finish is to keep it clean
by washing it often.

10-82 Vehicle Care
Approved cleaning products can be Cleaning Exterior Notice: Machine compounding

obtained from your dealer. Follow all Lamps/Lenses or aggressive polishing on a
manufacturers' directions regarding basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
correct product usage, necessary Use only lukewarm or cold water, may damage it. Use only
safety precautions and appropriate a soft cloth and a car washing soap non-abrasive waxes and polishes
disposal of any vehicle care to clean exterior lamps and lenses. that are made for a basecoat/
product. Follow instructions under Washing clearcoat paint finish on the
the Vehicle. vehicle.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all Finish Care Foreign materials such as calcium
cleaning agents completely. If they Occasional waxing or mild polishing chloride and other salts, ice melting
are allowed to dry on the surface, of the vehicle by hand may be agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
they could stain. necessary to remove residue from bird droppings, chemicals from
Dry the finish with a soft, clean the paint finish. Approved cleaning industrial chimneys, etc., can
chamois or an all-cotton towel to products can be obtained from your damage the vehicle's finish if they
avoid surface scratches and water dealer. remain on painted surfaces. Wash
spotting. the vehicle as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ If necessary, use non-abrasive
High pressure car washes may clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat cleaners that are marked safe
cause water to enter the vehicle. gives more depth and gloss to for painted surfaces to remove
Avoid using high pressure the colored basecoat. Always foreign matter.
washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) use waxes and polishes that are
to the surface of the vehicle. Use of non-abrasive and made for a Exterior painted surfaces are
power washers exceeding 8 274 kPa basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. subject to aging, weather and
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or chemical fallout that can take
removal of paint and decals. their toll over a period of years.
To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.

Vehicle Care 10-83
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Windshield and Wiper Blades Aluminum Wheels
Parts
Clean the outside of the windshield Notice: Using strong soaps,
Bright metal parts should be with glass cleaner. chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaned regularly to keep their cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
Clean the rubber blades using
luster. Washing with water is all that that contain acid on aluminum
a lint free cloth or paper towel
is usually needed. However, chrome or chrome-plated wheels, could
soaked with windshield washer
polish may be used on chrome or damage the surface of the
fluid or a mild detergent. Wash
stainless steel trim, if necessary. wheel(s). The repairs would
the windshield thoroughly when
Use special care with aluminum cleaning the blades. Bugs, road not be covered by the vehicle
trim. To avoid damaging protective grime, sap and a buildup of vehicle warranty. Use only approved
trim, never use auto or chrome wash/wax treatments may cause cleaners on aluminum or
polish, steam or caustic soap wiper streaking. Replace the wiper chrome-plated wheels.
to clean aluminum. A coating of blades if they are worn or damaged. Keep the wheels clean using a
wax, rubbed to high polish, is soft, clean cloth with mild soap
Wipers can be damaged by:
recommended for all bright metal and water. Rinse with clean water.
parts. . Extreme dusty conditions After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a
. Sand and salt soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
. Heat and sun
Notice: Using chrome polish on
. Snow and ice, without proper aluminum wheels could damage
removal the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.

10-84 Vehicle Care
The surface of these wheels is Tires Finish Damage

similar to the painted surface of
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush Any stone chips, fractures or deep
the vehicle. Do not use strong
with tire cleaner. scratches in the finish should be
soaps, chemicals, abrasive
Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired right away. Bare metal will
polishes, abrasive cleaners,
tire dressing products on the corrode quickly and may develop
cleaners with acid, or abrasive
vehicle may damage the paint into major repair expense.
cleaning brushes on them because
they could damage the surface. finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be
Do not use chrome polish on a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials
aluminum wheels. any overspray from all painted available from your dealer. Larger
surfaces on the vehicle. areas of finish damage can be
Notice: Driving the vehicle
corrected in your dealer's body
through an automatic car wash Sheet Metal Damage and paint shop.
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage If the vehicle is damaged and Chemicals used for ice and snow
the aluminum or chrome-plated requires sheet metal repair or removal and dust control can collect
wheels. The repairs would not be replacement, make sure the body on the underbody. If these are not
covered by the vehicle warranty. repair shop applies anti-corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can
Never drive a vehicle that has material to parts repaired or develop on the underbody parts
aluminum or chrome-plated replaced to restore corrosion such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
wheels through an automatic protection. and exhaust system even though
car wash that uses silicone Original manufacturer replacement they have corrosion protection.
carbide tire cleaning brushes. parts will provide the corrosion At least every spring, flush these
protection while maintaining the materials from the underbody
vehicle warranty. with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.

Vehicle Care 10-85
Dirt packed in close areas of the Chemical Paint Spotting Interior Care
frame should be loosened before
Some weather and atmospheric The interior will continue to look
being flushed. Your dealer or an
conditions can create a chemical its best if it is cleaned often.
underbody car washing system
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall Dust and dirt can accumulate on
can do this.
upon and attack painted surfaces the upholstery and cause damage
Underbody Maintenance on the vehicle. This damage can to the carpet, fabric, leather, and
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped plastic surfaces. Stains should be
Chemicals used for ice and snow discolorations, and small, irregular
removal and dust control can collect removed quickly as extreme heat
dark spots etched into the paint could cause them to set rapidly.
on the underbody. If these are not surface.
removed, corrosion and rust can Lighter colored interiors may
develop on the underbody parts Although no defect in the paint job require more frequent cleaning.
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, causes this, we will repair, at no Newspapers and garments that can
and exhaust system even though charge to the owner, the surfaces transfer color to home furnishings
they have corrosion protection. of new vehicles damaged by this can also transfer color to the
fallout condition within 12 months interior.
At least every spring, flush these or 20 000 km (12,000 miles) of
materials from the underbody purchase, whichever occurs first. Remove dust from small buttons
with plain water. Clean any areas and knobs with a small brush with
where mud and debris can collect. soft bristles.
Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system
can do this.

10-86 Vehicle Care
Your dealer has products for Cleaners can contain solvents that
. Use only mild, neutral-pH
cleaning the interior. When can become concentrated in the soaps. Avoid laundry detergents
cleaning the interior, only use interior. Before using cleaners, or dishwashing soaps with
cleaners specifically designed read and adhere to all safety degreasers. Using too much
for the surfaces that are being instructions on the label. While soap will leave a residue that
cleaned. Permanent damage can cleaning the interior, maintain leaves streaks and attracts
result from using cleaners on adequate ventilation by opening dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
surfaces for which they were not the doors and windows. 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
intended. Apply the cleaner directly water is a good guide.
Do not clean the interior using the
to the cleaning cloth to prevent following cleaners or techniques:
. Do not heavily saturate the
over-spray. Remove any accidental upholstery while cleaning.
over-spray from other surfaces . Never use a knife or any other
immediately. sharp object to remove a soil
. Cleaners that contain solvents
from any interior surface. can damage the interior.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces . Never use a stiff brush. It can
on the vehicle, could scratch the cause damage to the interior
glass and/or cause damage to surfaces.
the rear window defogger. When . Never apply heavy pressure or
cleaning the glass on the vehicle, rub aggressively with a cleaning
use only a soft cloth and glass cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
cleaner. damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.

Vehicle Care 10-87
Fabric/Carpet To clean: If any of the soil remains, a

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white commercial fabric cleaner or spot
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
cloth with water or club soda. lifter may be necessary. Test a small
brush attachment to remove dust
hidden area for colorfastness before
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum 2. Remove excess moisture. using a commercial upholstery
with a beater bar in the nozzle
3. Start on the outside edge of the cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
may only be used on floor carpet
soil and gently rub toward the cleaned area gives any impression
and carpeted floor mats. For soils,
center. Continue cleaning, using that a ring formation may result,
always try to remove them first with
a clean area of the cloth each clean the entire surface.
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much time it becomes soiled. A paper towel can be used to blot
of the soil as possible using one 4. Continue to gently rub the excess moisture from the fabric or
of the following techniques: soiled area. carpet after the cleaning process.
. For liquids: gently blot the 5. If the soil is not completely
remaining soil with a paper removed, use a mild soap
towel. Allow the soil to absorb solution and repeat the cleaning
into the paper towel until no process that was used with plain
more can be removed. water.
. For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.

10-88 Vehicle Care
Leather/Leatherette Do not use heat, steam, spot Instrument Panel, Vinyl and
lifters or spot removers, or shoe other Plastic Surfaces
Leather, and lighter colored leather
polish on leather. Many commercial
in particular, will need more frequent To remove dust, a soft cloth
leather cleaners and coatings that
cleaning to prevent the buildup of dampened with water can be
are sold to preserve and protect
dust, dirt, and colors transferred used. If a more thorough cleaning
leather may permanently change
from other items so that these do is necessary, a clean soft cloth
the appearance and feel of the
not become permanent stains. dampened with a mild soap solution
leather and are not recommended.
To remove dust, a soft cloth Do not use silicone or wax-based can be used to gently remove dust
dampened with water can products, or those containing and dirt. Never use spot lifters
be used. If a more thorough organic solvents to clean the or removers on plastic surfaces.
cleaning is necessary, a soft cloth interior because they can alter Many commercial cleaners and
dampened with a mild soap solution the appearance by increasing the coatings that are sold to preserve
can be used. Your dealer has a GM gloss in a non-uniform manner. and protect soft plastic surfaces
approved leather cleaner available may permanently change the
that provides superior cleaning appearance and feel of the interior
performance when used regularly and are not recommended. Do not
on finished automotive leathers. use silicone or wax-based products,
Allow the leather to dry naturally. or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because
they can alter the appearance
by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.

Vehicle Care 10-89
Some commercial products may Care of Safety Belts

increase gloss on the instrument WARNING (Continued)
Keep belts clean and dry.
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the cause unintended acceleration
windshield and even make it difficult { WARNING and/or increased stopping
to see through the windshield under distance which can cause a
certain conditions. Do not bleach or dye safety belts. crash and injury. Make sure the
It may severely weaken them. floor mat does not interfere with
Notice: Air fresheners contain In a crash, they might not be able
solvents that may cause the accelerator or brake pedal.
to provide adequate protection.
damage to plastics and Clean safety belts only with mild
painted surfaces. Follow the Use the following guidelines for
soap and lukewarm water.
manufacturers instructions proper floor mat usage.
when using air fresheners in the . The original equipment floor
vehicle. If air freshener comes Floor Mats mats were designed for your
in contact with paint or a plastic
surface, blot immediately with a vehicle. If the floor mats need
soft cloth. Damage caused by { WARNING replacing, it is recommended
using air fresheners would not be that GM certified floor mats be
If a floor mat is the wrong size purchased. Non-GM floor mats
covered by the vehicle warranty. or is not properly installed, it can may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator interfere with the accelerator or
pedal and/or brake pedal. brake pedal. Always check that
Interference with the pedals can the floor mats do not interfere
(Continued) with the pedals.

10-90 Vehicle Care

. Use the floor mat with the Removing and Replacing the
correct side up. Do not turn Floor Mat
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
The driver side floor mat is held in

place by one hook-type retainer.
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
remove it from the hooks.
2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining
up the openings on the floor mat
over the hooks and push it down
into position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedals.

Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 keep this vehicle in good the vehicle in good condition, see
working condition. Damage your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance caused by failure to follow
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 scheduled maintenance might
vehicles that:
not be covered by the vehicle
Recommended Fluids, warranty. . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and As the vehicle owner, you are
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 responsible for the scheduled
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement maintenance in this section.
on page 912.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 We recommend having your
. Are driven on reasonable road
dealer perform these services.
Maintenance Records Proper vehicle maintenance helps surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9 to keep the vehicle in good working limits.
condition, improves fuel economy, . Use the recommended fuel.
and reduces vehicle emissions for See Recommended Fuel on
better air quality. page 935.

11-2 Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, Scheduled

{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
Performing maintenance work
listed in Recommended Fluids Maintenance
and Lubricants on page 116 and
can be dangerous. Some jobs Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
can cause serious injury. Perform page 118. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter.
have the required know-how and See Engine Oil on page 107.
the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
An Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
have a qualified technician do performance of the vehicle, it is When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
the work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation SOON message displays, service
Service Work on page 104. service for new tires be performed. is required for the vehicle as
Tires should be rotated every soon as possible, within the next
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
At your dealer, you can be Rotation on page 1056. the best conditions, the engine oil
certain that you will receive the life system might not indicate the
highest level of service available. need for vehicle service for more
Your dealer has specially trained than a year. The engine oil and filter
service technicians, uses genuine must be changed at least once a
replacement parts, as well as, year and the oil life system must
uptodate tools and equipment be reset. Your dealer has trained
to ensure fast and accurate service technicians who will perform
diagnostics. this work and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is reset

. Windshield wiper blade . Brake system inspection
accidentally, service the vehicle inspection for wear, cracking, (or every 12 months, whichever
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since or contamination and windshield occurs first).
the last service. Reset the oil life and wiper blade cleaning, . Steering and suspension
system whenever the oil is changed. if contaminated. See Exterior inspection. Visual inspection
See Engine Oil Life System on Care on page 1081. Worn for damaged, loose, or missing
page 1011. or damaged wiper blade parts or signs of wear.
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Every Engine Oil Change Replacement on page 1031. . Body hinges and latches,
key lock cylinders, folding
. Change engine oil and . Tire inflation pressures seat hardware, and rear
filter. Reset oil life system. check. See Tire Pressure on compartment hinges lubrication.
See Engine Oil on page 107 page 1049. See Recommended Fluids
and Engine Oil Life System on . Tire wear inspection. See Tire and Lubricants on page 116.
page 1011. An Emission Control
Inspection on page 1056. More frequent lubrication may
Service.
. Rotate tires if necessary. be required when the vehicle
. Engine coolant level check. is exposed to a corrosive
See Tire Rotation on
See Engine Coolant on environment. Applying silicone
page 1056.
page 1017. grease on weatherstrips with
. Fluids visual leak check
. Engine cooling system a clean cloth makes them last
(or every 12 months, whichever longer, seal better, and not
inspection. Visual inspection
occurs first). A leak in any stick or squeak.
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
system must be repaired and
clamps and replacement, . Restraint system component
the fluid level checked.
if needed. check. See Safety System
. Engine air cleaner filter Check on page 325.
. Windshield washer fluid level
inspection. See Engine Air
check. See Washer Fluid on
Cleaner/Filter on page 1015.
page 1025.


. Fuel system inspection for Once a Month
. Accelerator pedal check for
damage or leaks. damage, high effort, or binding.
. Tire inflation pressures Replace if needed.
. Exhaust system and nearby heat check. See Tire Pressure on
shields inspection for loose or page 1049.
. Throttle system inspection
damaged components. for interference, binding
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire or for damaged or missing
Additional Required Services Inspection on page 1056. parts. Replace parts as
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles . Sunroof track and seal needed. Replace any
inspection, if equipped. components that have high
. Rotate tires. Tires should See Sunroof on page 218. effort or excessive wear.
be rotated every 12 000 km/ Do not lubricate accelerator
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation Once a Year or cruise control cables.
on page 1056. . See Starter Switch Check on . Underbody flushing service.
At Each Fuel Stop page 1029.
. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
. Engine oil level check. . See Automatic Transmission Support Gas Strut Service:
See Engine Oil on page 107. Shift Lock Control Function Visually inspect gas strut,
Check on page 1030. if equipped, for signs of wear,
. Engine coolant level check.
See Engine Coolant on . See Ignition Transmission Lock cracks, or other damage.
page 1017. Check on page 1030. Check the hold open ability
of the gas strut. Contact your
. Windshield washer fluid level . See Park Brake and P (Park)
dealer if service is required.
check. See Washer Fluid on Mechanism Check on
page 1025. page 1030.

First Engine Oil Change After or used for taxi, police, First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles or delivery service. Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
. Passenger compartment See Automatic Transmission . Automatic transmission fluid and
air filter replacement (or every Fluid on page 1012. filter change (normal service).
24 months, whichever occurs . Evaporative control system See Automatic Transmission
first). More frequent replacement inspection. Check all fuel and Fluid on page 1012.
may be needed if you drive vapor lines and hoses for proper . Spark plug replacement and
in areas with heavy traffic, hookup, routing, and condition. spark plug wires inspection.
areas with poor air quality, Check that the purge valve, See Engine Coolant on
or areas with high dust levels. if the vehicle has one, works page 1017. An Emission
Replacement may also be properly. Replace as needed. Control Service.
needed if you notice reduced An Emission Control Service.
air flow, windows fogging up, The U.S. Environmental First Engine Oil Change After
or odors. Your dealer can help Protection Agency or the Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
you determine when it is the California Air Resources . Engine cooling system drain,
right time to replace the filter. Board has determined that flush, and refill (or every five
the failure to perform this years, whichever occurs first).
First Engine Oil Change After maintenance item will not
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles See Engine Coolant on
nullify the emission warranty page 1017. An Emission
. Engine air cleaner filter or limit recall liability prior to Control Service.
replacement. See Engine Air the completion of the vehicle's
Cleaner/Filter on page 1015. useful life. We, however, . Engine drive belts inspection
urge that all recommended for fraying, excessive cracks,
. Automatic transmission fluid and or obvious damage (or every
filter change (severe service) for maintenance services be
performed at the indicated 10 years, whichever occurs
vehicles mainly driven in heavy first). Replace, if needed.
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly intervals and the maintenance
or mountainous terrain, when be recorded.
frequently towing a trailer,

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification.
Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 107.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 1017.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 89021320).
Windshield Washer Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Key Lock Cylinders
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood and Door Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 10350737 A2962C
Engine Oil Filter
3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines 19210285 PF61
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15284938 CF132
Spark Plugs
3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines 12591131 41100
Wiper Blades
Driver Side 55.0 cm (21.7 in) 15941731
Passenger Side 55.0 cm (21.7 in) 15941732

Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading

Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading


Odometer
Reading


Odometer
Reading

Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See Engine Specifications
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 122 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, has the
following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.

12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 116 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Automatic Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal) 7.0 L 7.4 qt
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3.5L and 3.9L V6 FlexFuel Engines 10.0 L 10.6 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
3.5L and 3.9L V6 FlexFuel Engines 3.8 L 4.0 qt
Fuel Tank 66.2 L 17.5 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
3.5L FlexFuel V6 K Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
3.9L FlexFuel V6 M Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines

12-4 Technical Data
2 NOTES

Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 are important to the dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by the dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-5 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-16 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Radio Frequency been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-17
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your
Courtesy Transportation Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 concern with a member of
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 dealership management. Normally,
Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10 concerns can be quickly resolved
Service Publications at that level. If the matter has
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-13 already been reviewed with the
sales, service, or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership
or the general manager.

13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with
it appears your concern cannot likely be resolved at a dealer's the decision given in your case,
be resolved by the dealership facility. That is why we suggest you may reject it and proceed with
without further help, in the U.S., following Step One first. any other venue for relief available
call the Chevrolet Customer STEP THREE U.S. Owners: to you.
Assistance Center at Both General Motors and the You may contact the BBB Auto
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, dealer are committed to making Line Program using the toll-free
call General Motors of Canada sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them
Customer Communication Centre with the new vehicle. However, at the following address:
at 1-800-263-3777 (English), if you continue to remain unsatisfied
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
after following the procedure Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the outlined in Steps One and Two, Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give you can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
your inquiry prompt attention. Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program Suite 800
Have the following information to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
available to give the Customer The BBB Auto Line Program
Assistance representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
is an out-of-court program www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification administered by the Council of
Number (VIN). This is available Better Business Bureaus to settle This program is available in
from the vehicle registration or automotive disputes regarding all 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left vehicle repairs or the interpretation Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
of the instrument panel and of the New Vehicle Limited vehicle age, mileage, and other
visible through the windshield. Warranty. Although you may be factors. General Motors reserves
required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue
dispute resolution program prior
. Vehicle delivery date and to filing a court action, use of the its participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your

STEP THREE Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you eligibility in the Canadian Motor
do not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
been addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, Chevrolet encourages customers
procedure outlined in Steps One or call the General Motors to call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Customer Communication assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
of its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French), the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited United States
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Centre Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited Center
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is The inquiry should be accompanied 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Number (VIN). Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.

From Puerto Rico: Overseas Customer Assistance

1-800-496-9992 (English) Please contact the local for Text Telephone (TTY)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) General Motors Business Unit. Users
From U.S. Virgin Islands: Mexico, Central America, and To assist customers who are deaf,
1-800-496-9994 Caribbean Islands/Countries hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
(Except Puerto Rico and and who use Text Telephones
Canada (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors of Canada Limited equipment available at its Customer
Customer Communication Centre, General Motors de Mexico, Assistance Center. Any TTY
S. de R.L. de C.V. user in the U.S. can communicate
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Customer Assistance Center with Chevrolet by dialing:
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
www.gm.ca Col. Granada Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
1-800-263-3777 (English)
01-800-466-0800
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800

Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links Here are a few of the valuable
Chevrolet www.chevrolet.com tools and services you will have
Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.) access to:
www.chevyownercenter.com Chevrolet Merchandise
www.chevymall.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
Information and services information on vehicles and
customized for your specific Help Center www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area.
vehicle all in one convenient pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do . My Dealers: Save details such
place. . FAQ as address and phone number
. Digital owner manual, warranty . Contact Us for each of your preferred GM
information, and more. dealers.
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
. Storage for online service and . My Driveway: Access quick
maintenance records. My GM Canada is a links to parts and service
password-protected section estimates, check trade-in
. Chevrolet dealer locator for of www.gm.ca where you can values, or schedule a service
service nationwide. save information on GM vehicles, appointment by adding the
. Exclusive privileges and offers. get personalized offers, and use vehicles you own to your
. Recall notices for your specific handy tools and forms with driveway profile.
vehicle. greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your
. OnStar and GM Cardmember profile and use tools and forms
Services Earnings summaries. with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.

GM Mobility General Motors of Canada Calling for Assistance

also has a Mobility Program.
Reimbursement Program Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
for details. TTY users call
ready:
1-800-263-3830.
. Your name, home address, and
Roadside Assistance home telephone number.
Program . Telephone number of your
location.
For U.S.purchased vehicles,
call 18002438872; (Text . Location of the vehicle.
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost Telephone (TTY): 18888892438). . Model, year, color, and license
reimbursement of eligible For Canadianpurchased vehicles, plate number of the vehicle.
aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800. . Odometer reading, Vehicle
required for the vehicle, such as Identification Number (VIN),
Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/ and delivery date of the vehicle.
365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
. Description of the problem.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text Telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.

Coverage Services Provided

. Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with the spare
Services are provided up to . Emergency Fuel Delivery: tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi), Delivery of enough fuel for the must be in good condition and
whichever comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest properly inflated. It is the owner's
In the U.S., anyone driving the service station. responsibility for the repair or
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . LockOut Service: Service replacement of the tire if it is
person driving the vehicle without to unlock the vehicle if you are not covered by the warranty.
permission from the owner is not locked out. A remote unlock may . Battery Jump Start: Service to
covered. be available if you have OnStar. jump start a dead battery.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of For security reasons, the driver
must present identification Services Not Included in
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of before this service is given. Roadside Assistance
Canada Limited reserve the right to . Emergency Tow from a Public . Impound towing caused by
make any changes or discontinue Road or Highway: Tow to the violation of any laws.
the Roadside Assistance program nearest Chevrolet dealer for . Legal fines.
at any time without notification. warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be . Mounting, dismounting,
Chevrolet and General Motors of or changing of snow tires,
Canada Limited reserve the right driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the chains, or other traction devices.
to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the sand, mud, or snow. . Towing or services for vehicles
claims are made too often, or the driven on a non-public road or
same type of claim is made many highway.
times.


. Trip Interruption Benefits
Services Specific to
and Assistance: Must be
Scheduling Service
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles Appointments
over 250 kilometers from
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement where your trip was started When the vehicle requires
is approximately $5 Canadian. to qualify. General Motors warranty service, contact the dealer
Diesel fuel delivery may be of Canada Limited requires and request an appointment. By
restricted. Propane and other pre-authorization, original scheduling a service appointment
fuels are not provided through detailed receipts, and a copy and advising the service consultant
this service. of the repair orders. Once of your transportation needs, the
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle authorization has been received, dealer can help minimize your
registration is required. the Roadside Assistance advisor inconvenience.
will help to make arrangements
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
maps of North America are payment. into the service department
provided when requested either immediately, keep driving it until
with the most direct route or the
. Alternative Service: If it can be scheduled for service,
most scenic route. There is a assistance cannot be provided unless, of course, the problem is
limit of six requests per year. right away, the Roadside safety related. If it is, please call
Additional travel information Assistance advisor may the dealership, let them know this,
is also available. Allow give permission to get local and ask for instructions.
three weeks for delivery. emergency road service.
You will receive payment, up to If the dealer requests you to bring
$100, after sending the original the vehicle for service, you are
receipt to Roadside Assistance. urged to do so as early in the work
Mechanical failures may be day as possible to allow for the
covered, however any cost for same-day repair.
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.

Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement
Program Warranty service can generally
be completed while you wait. If the vehicle requires overnight
To enhance your ownership warranty repairs, and public
However, if you are unable
experience, we and our participating transportation is used instead
to wait, GM helps to minimize
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy of the dealer's shuttle service,
inconvenience by providing several
Transportation, a customer support the expense must be supported
transportation options. Depending
program for vehicles with the by original receipts and can only
on the circumstances, the dealer
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty be up to the maximum amount
can offer one of the following:
Coverage period in Canada), allowed by GM for shuttle service.
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle Service In addition, for U.S. customers,
hybridspecific warranties in should you arrange transportation
Shuttle service is the preferred
both the U.S. and Canada. through a friend or relative, limited
means of offering Courtesy
Several Courtesy Transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide reimbursement for reasonable
options are available to assist in shuttle service to get you to your fuel expenses may be available.
reducing inconvenience when destination with minimal interruption Claim amounts should reflect
warranty repairs are required. of your daily schedule. This includes actual costs and be supported by
oneway or roundtrip shuttle service original receipts. See the dealer for
Courtesy Transportation is not a
within reasonable time and distance information regarding the allowance
part of the New Vehicle Limited
parameters of the dealer's area. amounts for reimbursement of fuel
Warranty. A separate booklet
or other transportation costs.
entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair

The dealer may arrange to Information
If the vehicle is involved in a
provide you with a courtesy All program options, such as shuttle collision and it is damaged,
rental vehicle or reimburse you service, may not be available at have the damage repaired by a
for a rental vehicle that you every dealer. Please contact the qualified technician using the proper
obtain if the vehicle is kept for dealer for specific information equipment and quality replacement
an overnight warranty repair. about availability. All Courtesy parts. Poorly performed collision
Rental reimbursement will be Transportation arrangements repairs diminish the vehicle resale
limited and must be supported will be administered by appropriate value, and safety performance can
by original receipts. This requires dealer personnel. be compromised in subsequent
that you sign and complete a collisions.
rental agreement and meet General Motors reserves the
state/provincial, local, and rental right to unilaterally modify, Collision Parts
vehicle provider requirements. change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and Genuine GM Collision parts are
Requirements vary and may new parts made with the same
include minimum age requirements, to resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms materials and construction methods
insurance coverage, credit card, as the parts with which the vehicle
etc. You are responsible for fuel and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion. was originally built. Genuine GM
usage charges and may also be Collision parts are the best choice to
responsible for taxes, levies, usage ensure that the vehicle's designed
fees, excessive mileage, or rental appearance, durability, and safety
usage beyond the completion of are preserved. The use of Genuine
the repair. GM parts can help maintain the GM
It may not be possible to provide a New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Recycled original equipment Aftermarket collision parts are Insuring The Vehicle
parts may also be used for repair. also available. These are made
Protect your investment in the
These parts are typically removed by companies other than GM and
GM vehicle with comprehensive
from vehicles that were total losses may not have been tested for the
and collision insurance coverage.
in prior crashes. In most cases, vehicle. As a result, these parts
There are significant differences
the parts being recycled are from may fit poorly, exhibit premature
in the quality of coverage afforded
undamaged sections of the vehicle. durability/corrosion problems,
by various insurance policy terms.
A recycled original equipment GM and may not perform properly in
Many insurance policies provide
part may be an acceptable choice subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
reduced protection to the GM
to maintain the vehicle's originally parts are not covered by the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
designed appearance and safety New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
for damage repairs by using
performance; however, the history and any vehicle failure related
aftermarket collision parts. Some
of these parts is not known. Such to such parts is not covered by
insurance companies will not
parts are not covered by the GM that warranty.
specify aftermarket collision parts.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
Repair Facility When purchasing insurance, we
any related failures are not covered
recommend that you ensure that
by that warranty. GM also recommends that you the vehicle will be repaired with GM
choose a collision repair facility original equipment collision parts.
that meets your needs before If such insurance coverage is
you ever need collision repairs. not available from your current
The dealer may have a collision insurance carrier, consider switching
repair center with GM-trained to another insurance carrier.
technicians and stateoftheart
equipment, or be able to
recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed
there. Specify to the facility that
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
any required replacement collision
parts be original equipment parts,
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification either new Genuine GM parts
emergency services for help.
Number (VIN). or recycled original GM parts.
Do not leave the scene of a crash
. Insurance company and policy Remember, recycled parts will
until all matters have been taken
number. not be covered by the GM
care of. Move the vehicle only if its
vehicle warranty.
position puts you in danger, or you . General description of the
are instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. Insurance pays the bill for the
officer. repair, but you must live with the
Choose a reputable repair facility repair. Depending on your policy
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. limits, your insurance company
to police and other parties involved See Collision Parts earlier in this may initially value the repair using
in the crash. section. aftermarket parts. Discuss this
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What with the repair professional, and
Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See After an Airbag insist on Genuine GM parts.
page 136. Inflates? on page 332.

Remember, if the vehicle is leased, Service Publications Owner Information

you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine
Ordering Information Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
GM parts, even if your insurance Service Manuals to provide basic operational
coverage does not pay the full cost.
Service Manuals have the information about the vehicle.
If another party's insurance diagnosis and repair information The Owner Manual includes the
company is paying for the repairs, on the engines, transmission, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all
you are not obligated to accept suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
a repair valuation based on that steering, body, etc. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
insurance company's collision
Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty
policy repair limits, as you have
Booklet.
no contractual limits with that Service Bulletins give additional
company. In such cases, you technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
can have control of the repair needed to knowledgeably service $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
and parts choices as long as the General Motors cars and trucks. shipping fees.
cost stays within reasonable limits. Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner
to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only.
service of the vehicle. RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.

Current and Past Models Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot

Technical Service Bulletins and become involved in individual
Manuals are available for current
Defects problems between you, your
and past model GM vehicles. dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
ORDER TOLL FREE: To contact NHTSA, you may
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
to the United States call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit has a defect which could cause to http://www.safercar.gov;
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. a crash or could cause injury or or write to:
Or write to: death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130 Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590
Detroit, MI 48207 (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors. You can also obtain other
Prices are subject to change information about motor
without notice and without incurring If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
obligation. Allow ample time for complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
delivery. investigation, and if it finds
All listed prices are quoted in that a safety defect exists in a
U.S. funds. Make checks payable group of vehicles, it may order
in U.S. funds. a recall and remedy campaign.

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you (or Transport Canada) in a situation
believe that the vehicle has a like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of
safety defect, notify Transport sophisticated computers that record
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Canada immediately, and notify information about the vehicles
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven.
General Motors of Canada Limited.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, the vehicle uses
Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
Center computer modules to monitor and
write to:
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the
Road Safety Branch conditions for airbag deployment
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
2780 Sheffield Road and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 if so equipped, to provide antilock
(French), or write:
braking to help the driver control the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store
Customer Communication Centre, data to help the dealer technician
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owners personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.

Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or
understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with
This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. the consent of the vehicle owner
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose or, if the vehicle is leased, with the
of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response
crash or near crash-like situations, to an official request by police or
such as an airbag deployment or crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part
hitting a road obstacle, data that of GM's defense of litigation through
will assist in understanding how driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, the discovery process; or, as
a vehicle's systems performed. required by law. Data that GM
The EDR is designed to record and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as collects or receives may also be
data related to vehicle dynamics used for GM research needs or
and safety systems for a short law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of may be made available to others for
period of time, typically 30 seconds research purposes, where a need is
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a shown and the data is not tied to a
designed to record such data as: specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
crash investigation.
. How various systems in the
vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
buckled/fastened. manufacturer, other parties, such
. How far, if at all, the driver was as law enforcement, that have the
pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
brake pedal. information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.

OnStar Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

If the vehicle is equipped with Identification (RFID) Statement
an active OnStar system, that RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
system may also record data in vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
crash or near crashlike situations. pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
The OnStar Terms and Conditions system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
provides information on data connection with conveniences rules and with Industry Canada
collection and use and is available such as key fobs for remote door Standards RSS210/220/310.
in the OnStar glove box kit, locking/unlocking and starting, and
at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or door openers. RFID technology in
by pressing the Q button and GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
speaking to an advisor. personal information or link with interference.
any other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

2 NOTES

INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake

What Will You See After System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Appearance Care
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-28 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Airbags Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Adjustments
Adding Equipment to the Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Assistance Program,
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-15
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Air Filter, Passenger
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Servicing Airbag-Equipped CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Audio System
Airbag System
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Alarm System Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
How Does an Airbag
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Automatic
Passenger Sensing
Antenna Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-25
What Makes an Airbag
Anti-Theft Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Shift Lock Control
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-36 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cautions, Danger, and

Headlamps, Front Turn Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Signal, Sidemarker, and CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-36 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Voltage and Charging
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-35 System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-31
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Check
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-20
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 C Ignition
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-30
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
California Child Restraints
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Infants and Young
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Perchlorate Materials Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Lower Anchors and
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-51
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Capacities and Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57, 3-59
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Carbon Monoxide Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Cleaning
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Door

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Text Telephone (TTY) Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Customer Information Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10 Service Publications Driver Information
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-13 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Customer Satisfaction Driving
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Characteristics and
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 D Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Coolant Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Danger, Warnings, and Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Engine Temperature Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-16 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine Temperature Daytime Running Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Lamps/Automatic Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Courtesy Transportation Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Driving for Better Fuel
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont.) F
Coolant Temperature
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Filter,
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Electrical Equipment, Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cooling System Messages . . .5-32
Electrical System Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Engine Compartment Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Fuses and Circuit Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Overheated Protection
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Fluid
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Instrument Panel Fuse Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-12
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-31 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-25
Electronic Stability Control Fog Lamps
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Engine Oil
Engine Front Fog Lamps
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Check and Service Engine Front Seats
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-16
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Coolant Temperature
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 G H
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Filling a Portable Fuel
Gasoline Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Headlamps
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Gauges Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-36
Engine Coolant Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-36
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Daytime Running
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Lamps/Automatic
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Requirements, California . . . . .9-36
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Headlamps, Front Turn
Fuel Economy
Warning Lights and Signal, Sidemarker, and
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Fuses
General Information High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Engine Compartment
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuses and Circuit
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Heater
Instrument Panel Fuse GM Mobility Reimbursement Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1

i-6 INDEX
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 K LATCH, Lower Anchors and

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-34
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8 Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Keyless Entry
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Lighting
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
How to Wear Safety Belts Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
L Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-43
I Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Lights
Lamps Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Ignition Transmission Lock
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Antilock Brake System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20
Infants and Young Children,
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Engine Coolant
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-24
LATCH System Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
J Replacing Parts After a Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

INDEX i-7
Lights (cont.) M Messages (cont.)

High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Maintenance
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14 Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Maintenance Schedule
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Traction Control System Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
(TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Locks Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Mirrors
Messages
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Automatic Dimming
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-36
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Battery Voltage and
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Lower Anchors and Monitor System, Tire
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-32
Tethers for Children Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
(LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 N
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

i-8 INDEX
O P Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Off-Road Park
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Oil Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Parking
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Brake and P (Park)
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-30
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-42 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Passenger Airbag Status
Privacy
OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Radio Frequency
Operation, Infotainment Passenger Compartment Air
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Program
Outlets Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-34
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-9
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Perchlorate Materials
Proposition 65 Warning,
Overheated Engine Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Protection Personalization
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21

INDEX i-9
R Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Roof

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Radio Frequency
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-17
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Running the Vehicle While
Radios
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-42 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Replacing LATCH System
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 S
Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
System Parts After a Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Restraints Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49 Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-25
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Retained Accessory Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23
Records
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Safety Defects Reporting
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
Recreational Vehicle
Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-31 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Reimbursement Program,
Roads Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Remote Keyless Entry
Roadside Assistance Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

i-10 INDEX
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2 Service (cont.) Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Seats Publications Ordering Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Shift Lock Control Function Storage
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Check, Automatic Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Storage Areas
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Shifting Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Securing Child Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57, 3-59 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Security Sidemarker Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Signals, Turn and Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Service Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Accessories and Spare Tire Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Specifications and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 System
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Maintenance, General Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-29

INDEX i-11
T Tires (cont.) Transmission

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Terminology and Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Taillamps
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Uniform Tire Quality Transportation Program,
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12
Wheel Alignment and Tire Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Turn and Lane-Change
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-63 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Tires
When It Is Time for New Turn Signal
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Towing
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-42 U
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Uniform Tire Quality
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-41 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-79 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-45
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-52
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Traction Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-29
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Control System Warning
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-51
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

i-12 INDEX
V Vehicle Care Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-38
Vehicle
Vehicle Identification Wheels
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Service Parts Identification Alignment and Tire
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Identification
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
When It Is Time for New
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 W Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Warning Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-49
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Warning Lights, Gauges, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Windshield
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-31

Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual - 2011

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual - 2011

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2011 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This manual describes features Canadian Vehicle Owners

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using this Manual Symbols

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In Brief Sensing System for Passenger

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A. Air Vents on page 85. L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Initial Drive

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Remote Keyless Press Q to lock all doors. Remote Vehicle Start

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Windows Seat Adjustment 2. Slide the seat to the desired

The power window switches

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Power Seats Power Reclining Seatback Manual Lumbar

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mirror Adjustment Interior Mirror

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

P : Briefly turn to this position Windshield Wiper/Washer 9 : Turns the windshield

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls

A. Fan Control F. Driver and Passenger Heated

C. Recirculation G. Driver and Passenger

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A. Fan Control F. Air Conditioning

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Features : Seek or scan stations.

Radio with CD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock Satellite Radio

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth Steering Wheel Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Roadside Assistance Online Owner Center Automatic Crash Response

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility OnStar

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Doors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks Remote Keyless